Page 1 Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use. In particular, be sure to read "1.1.1 For Your Safety (Page 14)" before using this product. KX-NS500: PFMPR Software File Version 001.00000 or later...
Page 2 Introduction About this Programming Manual The PC Programming Manual is designed to serve as a system programming reference for the Panasonic IP-PBX. It explains how to programme this PBX using Web Maintenance Console. The PC Programming Manual is divided into the following sections: Section 1, Overview Provides an overview of programming the PBX.
Page 3 • Some optional hardware, software, and features are not available in some countries/areas, or for some PBX models. Please consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information. • Product specifications, including text displayed by the software, are subject to change without notice.
Page 4: Table Of Contents
Table of Contents Table of Contents 1 Overview ....................13 Introduction ........................14 1.1.1 For Your Safety ......................14 1.1.2 Introduction ........................16 1.1.3 Entering Characters .......................17 PC Programming ......................21 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console ................21 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode ................25 1.2.2.1 Editing and Printing Terminal Labels in Off-line Mode ..........30 2 Introduction of Web Maintenance Console .........31 Introduction ........................32...
Page 5 Table of Contents Tool—Export ........................86 Tool—Screen Customise ....................87 Tool—UM Data Backup ....................88 6.8.1 Tool—UM Data Backup—Manual Backup ..............89 6.8.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup ..............90 Tool—UM Data Restore ....................91 6.10 Tool—UM Backup History ....................93 6.11 Tool—DXDP All OUS .......................94 6.12 Tool—Contact information .....................95 6.13 Tool—UT Option Setting ....................96 6.14...
Page 6 Table of Contents 7.10.2 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting .........135 7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List ........136 7.10.4 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Maintenance ..........139 7.11 Utility—UM - System Maintenance ................140 7.12 Utility—CS-Web Connection ..................141 8 Users .....................143 Users—User Profiles ....................144 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting ..............146 Users—Add User ......................151 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User ...................151...
Page 7 Table of Contents 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Extension—Port Property ...353 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type ...358 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port ....366 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type .....370 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port ....379 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type ....390 9.28...
Page 8 Table of Contents 10.11.2 PBX Configuration—[2-11-2] System—Audio Gain—Card ..........551 11 PBX Configuration—[3] Group ............553 11.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1] Group—Trunk Group ............554 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings ......554 11.1.2 PBX Configuration—[3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority ....562 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification ....563 11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan .......568 11.1.4.1...
Page 9 Table of Contents 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND .......662 12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial ......663 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button ....664 12.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy ......................674 12.1.5 PBX Configuration—[4-1-5] Extension—Wired Extension—PF Button ......675 12.1.6 PBX Configuration—[4-1-6] Extension—Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send ..........................676...
Page 10 Table of Contents 16.3 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time ..........791 16.3.1 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time—Time Setting ......792 16.4 PBX Configuration—[8-4] ARS—Routing Plan Priority ..........793 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier ..............794 16.6 PBX Configuration—[8-6] ARS—Leading Number Exception ........797 16.7 PBX Configuration—[8-7] ARS—Authorisation Code for TRG .........798 17 PBX Configuration—[9] Private Network ...........799 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table ..........800...
Page 11 Table of Contents 24.2 UM Configuration—[5-2] System Parameters—Extension Group ......944 24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement ......................946 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters ........948 25 UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings ..........969 25.1 UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings ................970 26 UM Configuration—[7] System Security ..........971 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security ..............972 27 Network Service ...................977...
Page 12 Table of Contents PC Programming Manual...
Page 13: Overview
Section 1 Overview This section provides an overview of programming the PBX. PC Programming Manual...
Page 14: Introduction
1.1.1 For Your Safety 1.1 Introduction 1.1.1 For Your Safety To prevent personal injury and/or damage to property, be sure to observe the following safety precautions. The following symbols classify and describe the level of hazard and injury caused when this unit is operated or handled improperly.
Page 15 Unplug the PBX from the AC outlet if it emits smoke, an abnormal smell or makes unusual noise. These conditions can cause fire or electric shock. Confirm that smoke has stopped and contact an authorised Panasonic Factory Service Centre. CAUTION •...
Page 16: Introduction
1.1.2 Introduction 1.1.2 Introduction These programming instructions are designed to serve as an overall system programming reference for the PBX. Each feature in the PBX has default settings that can be changed to customise the PBX to your requirements. These settings control the functions of the PBX, and changing them is referred to as "system programming".
Page 17: Entering Characters
1.1.3 Entering Characters 1.1.3 Entering Characters The characters on a white background below can be used when storing a name, message, password or other text entry data using a PC. The available characters vary according to the model of PBX. Note For NE models, the tables differ depending on the Area Code selected in Easy Setup.
Page 18 1.1.3 Entering Characters Table 2 (For NE model) PC Programming Manual...
Page 19 1.1.3 Entering Characters Table 3 (For RU/UC model) PC Programming Manual...
Page 20 1.1.3 Entering Characters Table 4 (For Greece) PC Programming Manual...
Page 21: Pc Programming
1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console 1.2 PC Programming 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console System programming, diagnosis and administration can be performed with a PC using Web Maintenance Console. Web Maintenance Console is accessed through a Web browser running on a networked PC. This section describes how to set up and access Web Maintenance Console.
Page 22 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console Recommended Specification 2048 MB Hard Disk 10 GB available space Copyright for MD5 This software uses the Source Code of RSA Data Security, Inc. described in the RFC1321 (MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm). Copyright (C) 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc. Created 1991. All rights reserved. Licence to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as the "RSA Data Security, Inc.
Page 23 – http://kx-ns500. Note • If entering "http://kx-ns500.", be sure to include the period at the end as shown. • If it takes a long time to connect when 223.0.0.1 is entered, configure a static IP address to the LAN connected to the PC.
Page 24 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console For more details, refer to "5.2 PC Connection—Connection via RMT Card (KX-TDA0196)" or "5.2 PC Connection—Connection via PRI Card (KX-NS5290CE)" in the Installation Manual. Start the Off-line Web Maintenance launcher : Analogue Line connection: 1) Click the Connect-Online Mode button. 2) Select the Modem tab.
Page 25: Pc Programming Using Off-Line Mode
The following procedures outline how to install and use the Off-line Web Maintenance Console for Off-line mode programming. Installation Note • Be sure to install and use the latest version of "KX-NS500 Off-line WEB-Maintenance Console". • Before beginning the installation of Off-line Web Maintenance Console, the following software must be installed on the PC: –...
Page 26 Easy Setup Wizard. For details, see 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard. To convert a KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200’s or KX-TE’s system data file to KX-NS500 KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 or KX-TE system data can be converted for use with the KX-NS500 by using the Database Converter. In the Programme Launcher, click Database Converter. The Database Converter screen will be displayed in your PC.
Page 27 When you use the following procedure to open a system file created using a previous version of the KX-NS500 software, a confirmation screen will be displayed asking whether you want to convert the system data to the latest software version. Click Yes to convert the data and proceed with Off-line programming.
Page 28 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode VoIP Test Tool Click the VoIP Test Tool button to launch the VoIP Test Tool. This tool is identical to the VoIP Test Tool included with the Unified PC Maintenance Console for KX-TDA/KX-TDE/KX-NCP PBXs. IP Terminal Utility Click the IP Terminal button to launch the IP Terminal setup utility.
Page 29 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode Uploading Programmed Settings to the PBX When programming in Off-line mode, clicking the icon will open a save dialogue box. Specify a location and file name for the system data file. This file can then be uploaded to the PBX in On-line mode using the "File Transfer PC to PBX"...
Page 30: Editing And Printing Terminal Labels In Off-Line Mode
1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode 1.2.2.1 Editing and Printing Terminal Labels in Off-line Mode Follow the procedure below to print key label sheets for use with your system’s extensions and DSS consoles. In On-line mode, export PBX system data to your PC, and then open the exported data in Off-line mode. In On-line mode, use the File Transfer PBX to PC utility to save your system’s data and settings to your PC.
Page 31: Introduction Of Web Maintenance Console
Section 2 Introduction of Web Maintenance Console This section serves as reference operating instructions when using Web Maintenance Console to programme the PBX. PC Programming Manual...
Page 32: Introduction
2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts 2.1 Introduction 2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts User account levels Access to Web Maintenance Console requires a login name and password, which are assigned to accounts in the PBX. Also, access to Web Maintenance Console is controlled by different levels of authorisation. The Installer level is the highest authorisation level.
Page 33 2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts Level Login Name Password Installer INSTALLER 4-16 character password, using a-z, A-Z, and 0-9 (case sensitive). For an initialised PBX that has not yet been set up, the default Installer level password is "1234". You will be prompted to choose a new password for the Installer level account when the Easy Setup Wizard is run (see 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard).
Page 34: Access Levels
2.1.2 Access Levels 2.1.2 Access Levels Access to menu options within Web Maintenance Console is restricted depending on the level of the account and the current programming mode (see Programming Modes in 1.1.2 Introduction). When a menu option is limited to certain access levels, this is noted in this manual in the initial description of that menu option, for example: "This option is only available at Installer level."...
Page 35 2.1.2 Access Levels Menu Option Off-line On-line ü ü Import®V-IPGW DN2IP Import®V-SIPGW Settings ü ü ü ü Import®V-SIPGW Provider ü ü ü ü Export®Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID ü ü Export®Incoming Call - DDI/DID Table ü ü Export®ARS - Leading Digit ü...
Page 36 2.1.2 Access Levels Menu Option Off-line On-line File View ü File Delete ü Message File Transfer PC to PBX ü Message File Transfer PBX to PC ü Error Log ü ü Syslog ü Web-MC Event Log ü ü UM System Log ü...
Page 37: Logging In To Web Maintenance Console
2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console 2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console After establishing a connection to Web Maintenance Console (see 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console), the login window is displayed, and a login name and password must be entered. If this is the first time to log in to Web Maintenance Console, and the PBX is in its initialised, factory default state, you must log in using the Installer level account to begin the Easy Setup Wizard (see 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard).
Page 38: Easy Setup Wizard
2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard In the Easy Setup Wizard, you will configure the mandatory settings required for the PBX. When you log in to Web Maintenance Console for a PBX that is in its initialised, factory default state, the Easy Setup Wizard for that PBX will launch automatically.
Page 39: Card Status
2.1.5 Card Status 2.1.5 Card Status Certain tools, utilities and settings require that the target card be set to out-of-service (OUS) or in-service (INS) status before the operation is carried out. Where required, this is noted in the description of each item. Card status changes can be performed only in On-line mode (see Programming Modes in 1.1.2 Introduction).
Page 40: Extension Number Setting
2.1.6 Extension Number Setting 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting Many screens within the Maintenance Console software allow you to select extensions as part of programming various features (for example, as members of a group). These screens use a standard window to make selecting multiple extensions easy, accessed by clicking a button.
Page 41: Logout
2.2 Logout 2.2 Logout To logout of Web Maintenance Console, click the button to end the programming session and return to the Login screen. When this option is chosen, system data is automatically saved from the temporary memory (DRAM) of the PBX to the System Memory. To logout Click the button.
Page 42: Frequently Asked Questions (Faq)
2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) This section provides answers to some common questions about using the Maintenance Console software to programme the PBX. The information is divided into the following topics: Title Description Connection Connecting to the PBX using Maintenance Console. Maintenance Console Software Using the Maintenance Console software.
Page 43 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) Card Status The status of a new card will not change to "INS". • With the new card installed, does the total number of extensions or trunks exceed the maximum supported by the PBX? • Is the type of card installed in the slot different from the card type set as "Pre-Install"...
Page 44 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • The Portable Station can be forcibly de-registered by following the procedure shown Forced De-registration of 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station. I changed the extension number of a Portable Station, but the display of the Portable Station still shows the old extension number.
Page 45 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • Select 3-digits for default value of Numbering Plan in the Easy Setup Wizard. If you want to change to a 3-digit extension numbering plan after the PBX system is already running using a 4-digit extension numbering plan, follow the procedure below. There are 2 methods of creating a 3-digit numbering plan, using 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main: Set the leading number to be 2 digits, with one additional digit.
Page 46 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) When modifying the Numbering Plan, how do I set a 1-digit extension number? • Perform the following steps: Clear the Leading Number cell. Click Apply. No. of Additional Digits to "None". Click Apply. Enter the desired value in the Leading Number cell.
Page 47 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • It is not possible to use the same number for 2 items. The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by: • A feature number • An extension •...
Page 48 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) Setting Features How do I change the dialling mode of an analogue trunk? • From the 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port screen, change the Dialling Mode setting of the target port to "DTMF" or "Pulse", as required.
Page 49 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • Perform the following steps: On the 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings screen, enter the floating extension number you chose for the ICD group in the Floating Extension Number cell. Click Apply. On the 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List screen, select the ICD group you created from the ICD Group No.
Page 50 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) PC Programming Manual...
Page 51: Web Maintenance Console Home Screen
Section 3 Web Maintenance Console Home Screen This section explains how to setup the main PBX and other connected PBXs from the Home Screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 52: Home Screen
3.1 Home Screen 3.1 Home Screen When you log in to Web Maintenance Console, the home screen is displayed. For information about connecting to Web Maintenance Console and logging in, see 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console. The home screen of Web Maintenance Console is divided into several areas, as shown below: Logged in Account Level The logged in account level is displayed.
Page 53 3.1 Home Screen Web Maintenance Console Features Clicking these buttons provides features for Web Maintenance Console, as follows: Button Description Clicking this button will save any changes made to settings to the System Memory. Programming changes that are not saved will be lost if the PBX is reset or is turned off.
Page 54 3.1 Home Screen Maintenance Screen Tree View Items Item Primary Functions Status • Check the status of the PBX’s system hardware • Check the status of PBX equipment (PSs, CSs, etc.) • Check the status of extensions used by the Unified Messaging system For details, see Section 4 Status.
Page 55 3.1 Home Screen The standard buttons are as follows: Button Function Temporarily implements changes to the system’s memory (DRAM) and closes the current screen. Cancel Abandons changes and closes the current screen. Apply Temporarily implements changes to the system’s memory (DRAM) and remains on the same screen.
Page 56 3.1 Home Screen PC Programming Manual...
Page 57: Status
Section 4 Status This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Status menu of the Maintenance screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 58: Status-Equipment Status
4.1.1 Status—Equipment Status—UPS 4.1 Status—Equipment Status 4.1.1 Status—Equipment Status—UPS Information is provided about the status of the UPS device and the connection to the PBX • UPS Connection Status Displays if the UPS system is connected or not connected. If a UPS system is connected, the information below will be displayed for the UPS system.
Page 59: Status-Equipment Status-Cs Information
4.1.2 Status—Equipment Status—CS Information 4.1.2 Status—Equipment Status—CS Information Displays information stored by the PBX regarding each Cell Station (CS). This option is only available for the Installer level account in On-line mode and requires that the target V-IPCS4 card be set to INS status. The displayed items are as follows: Item Description...
Page 60: Status-Equipment Status-Ps Information
4.1.3 Status—Equipment Status—PS Information 4.1.3 Status—Equipment Status—PS Information Displays Portable Station (PS) registration information, including the associated Cell Station (CS). This option is only available for the Installer level account in On-line mode. The displayed items are as follows: Item Description PS No.
Page 61: Status-Equipment Status-Um Port Status
4.1.4 Status—Equipment Status—UM Port status 4.1.4 Status—Equipment Status—UM Port status The UM Port status screen displays each port’s status and number for the Unified Messaging system. The screen will be updated every 30 seconds. Each port’s status will be displayed in one of the following ways: •...
Page 62: Status-Equipment Status-Usb
4.1.5 Status—Equipment Status—USB 4.1.5 Status—Equipment Status—USB USB Mount Status indicates if a USB memory device is connected to the PBX. There is also an Unmount button. • Mounted: A USB memory device is connected to the PBX. Before removing the USB memory device from the PBX, click Unmount.
Page 63: System Control
Section 5 System Control This section serves as reference operating instructions for the System Control menu of the Maintenance screen when programming using Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 64: System Control-Program Update
The programme files for the following hardware components can be updated with the Program Update feature. Each file must be named as indicated in the table to be recognised by the KX-NS500. Hardware that can be updated using Program Update...
Page 65: System Control-Program Update-Download Program File
• When using an FTP server with this feature, the programme files to be downloaded to the KX-NS500 PBX must be named on the FTP server in a specific way that includes the version number. Example: "PNT300_xxx_xxx_xxx" ("xxx_xxx_xxx" is the version number.) Manual Using manual operations, the location of updated PBX software is specified and downloaded to the Main unit.
Page 66 5.1.1 System Control—Program Update—Download Program File • Check only: The specified download server is checked at the specified times. If an e-mail is entered in Email notification, an e-mail notification is sent when updated files have been discovered. Note If Check only is selected, updated files will have to be downloaded manually (see the manual procedure above).
Page 67: System Control-Program Update-Update Program File
5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File 5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File Once updated programme files have been downloaded and are stored on a PBX, they can be used to update the system files of the PBX. The update process can be set to be automatically performed at a specified time, or the update process can be carried out manually.
Page 68: System Control-Program Update-Plug And Update
5.1.3 System Control—Program Update—Plug and Update 5.1.3 System Control—Program Update—Plug and Update The Plug and Update feature allows IP-PTs to be automatically updated to the latest software version when they are registered to the PBX. When Plug and Update is enabled, the version number of the system software stored on the Main unit is compared to the system software currently in the IP-PT, after the IP-PT has been registered to the PBX.
Page 69: System Control-Moh
5.2.1 System Control—MOH—Install 5.2 System Control—MOH 5.2.1 System Control—MOH—Install Sound files on the programmer’s PC can be installed to each PBX for use as Music on Hold (MOH). This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. Click Browse and select a WAV file to install as an MOH file. Only one file may be installed at a time. As uploading the file to the PBX may require some time, a time can be set in Time Set.
Page 70: System Control-Moh-Delete
5.2.2 System Control—MOH—Delete 5.2.2 System Control—MOH—Delete MOH files that are occupying BGM numbers can be deleted. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. In BGM No., specify the BGM numbers to delete MOH files from. Specify "All" to delete the data saved in all BGM numbers.
Page 71: System Control-Moh-Status / Backup
5.2.3 System Control—MOH—Status / Backup 5.2.3 System Control—MOH—Status / Backup MOH files stored on a PBX can be downloaded to the user’s PC. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The MOH files saved to the PBX will be listed. Click Backup for the file you would like to back up. One file can be backed up at a time.
Page 72: System Control-System Reset
5.3 System Control—System Reset 5.3 System Control—System Reset When programming changes or other changes to PBX settings require a system reset, this command allows a reset to be performed remotely from Web Maintenance Console. When the system is reset, any settings not saved to the System Memory are lost. A backup should be performed before the reset to ensure no data is lost.
Page 73: System Control-System Shutdown
5.4 System Control—System Shutdown 5.4 System Control—System Shutdown In order to turn off the power to a PBX, it must first be issued a shutdown command using Web Maintenance Console. Follow the procedure below to prepare a PBX for system shutdown. When the system is shut down, any settings not saved to the System Memory are lost.
Page 74 5.4 System Control—System Shutdown PC Programming Manual...
Page 75: Tool
Section 6 Tool This section serves as reference for the Tool menu of the Maintenance screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 76: Tool-System Data Backup
6.1.1 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to USB 6.1 Tool—System Data Backup 6.1.1 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to USB A PBX’s system data can be backed up to a USB memory device inserted into the PBX’s USB port. At a later time, the USB memory device can be used to restore the backed up system data to a PBX. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 77: Tool-System Data Backup-Backup To Nas
6.1.2 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to NAS • The USB memory device is removed from the USB port of the PBX during the restoration process. • The following characters cannot be used in the names of the backup files: open bracket, close bracket, space, forward slash ("/"), period ("."), or 0 (zero).
Page 78: Tool-Ndss Link Data Clear
6.2 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear 6.2 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear Clears NDSS Link Data stored in the connected PBX. While this tool clears both monitor extension and monitored extension data, it only clears it at the connected PBX. To clear this data at other PBXs in the QSIG network, it is necessary to run this tool at those PBXs.
Page 79: Tool-Call Pickup For My Group
6.3 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group 6.3 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group Allows you to automatically configure settings in 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial and 12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial so that users can answer calls to their Call Pickup Group by pressing " 0". To activate this tool When this tree menu item is selected, a confirmation screen will be displayed.
Page 80: Tool-Extension List View
6.4 Tool—Extension List View 6.4 Tool—Extension List View Displays a list of all programmed extension numbers and types. It is possible to sort the information according to Extension Number, Type, Extension Name, Shelf, Slot, or Port. There is also a key-word searching feature. The types that can be displayed are as follows: Type Detail...
Page 81: Tool-Import
6.5 Tool—Import 6.5 Tool—Import Allows several types of system data files or tables to be imported. Except for Speed Dial and Caller ID, this option is only available at Installer level. The files from which data can be imported are files that were previously saved at this or another PBX using the Export tool (see 6.6 Tool—Export), or comma-separated value (CSV) files.
Page 82 6.5 Tool—Import Related programming: 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table ARS - Leading Digit Data Type Import Destination Location Location Leading Number Leading Digit Additional Number of Digits Additional Dial Digits Routing Plan Number Route Plan Number Related programming: 16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number ARS - Except Code Data Type...
Page 83 6.5 Tool—Import Quick Dial* Data Type Import Destination Location Dial Dial Phone Number Phone Number Related programming: 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial SIP Extension Data Type Import Destination Location Extension Number Extension Number Password* Password Related programming: 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT—Port Property V-IPGW GW Settings Data Type Import Destination...
Page 84 6.5 Tool—Import Data Type Import Destination T38 FAX Max Datagram T38 FAX Max Datagram T38 FAX UDPTL Error Correction – T38 FAX UDPTL Error Correction – Redundancy Redundancy T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for T.30 messages for T.30 messages T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for data...
Page 85 Notices Regarding Importing Data from KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 PBXs to the KX-NS500 Quick Dial The KX-NS500 only supports an 8-digit Quick Dial format. Therefore, KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 Quick Dial data in the 4-digit format cannot be imported to the KX-NS500. PC Programming Manual...
Page 86: Tool-Export
6.6 Tool—Export 6.6 Tool—Export Allows several types of system data to be exported to files. These files can be used with the Import tool (see 6.5 Tool—Import) to update another PBX. Except for ARS - Routing Plan, tables are exported as comma-separated value (CSV) files. Except for Speed Dial and Caller ID, this option is only available at Installer level.
Page 87: Tool-Screen Customise
6.7 Tool—Screen Customise 6.7 Tool—Screen Customise Allows you to specify which Setup and Maintenance screens can be accessed in the User (Administrator) account level. This option is only available at Installer level. Selected check boxes will be displayed in the tree menus of Web Maintenance Console to users with the User (Administrator) account level.
Page 88: Tool-Um Data Backup
6.8 Tool—UM Data Backup 6.8 Tool—UM Data Backup The UM Data Backup tool can be used to backup and restore Unified Messaging (UM) data. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The following voice data can be backed up or restored as individual files. The data can be backed up to a USB memory device connected to the PBX or a NAS.
Page 89: Tool-Um Data Backup-Manual Backup
6.8.1 Tool—UM Data Backup—Manual Backup 6.8.1 Tool—UM Data Backup—Manual Backup Use this procedure to manually back up Unified Messaging system data. For details on the items that can be backed up, see 6.8 Tool—UM Data Backup. To back up system prompts, select the check box next to System Prompts and select the check boxes of the items you want to back up.
Page 90: Tool-Um Data Backup-Scheduled Backup
6.8.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup 6.8.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup You can schedule backups in advance. The Unified Messaging system will automatically back up the selected data at the scheduled times to a USB memory device or NAS connected to the PBX. (Scheduled backups cannot be made to a local PC.) For details on the items that can be backed up, see 6.8 Tool—UM Data Backup.
Page 91: Tool-Um Data Restore
6.9 Tool—UM Data Restore 6.9 Tool—UM Data Restore Follow the procedure below to restore data backed up using the UM Data Backup tool. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. For more information about the UM Data Backup tool, see 6.8 Tool—UM Data Backup. You can restore data from a USB memory device connected to the PBX or from a file on your local PC.
Page 92 Voice data recorded by users in a KX-TVM series VPS can be converted and used as voice data in the KX-NS500’s Unified Messaging system. For details, refer to "5.3 Starting Web Maintenance Console—KX-TVM System Prompt and Mailbox Data Import" in the Installation Manual.
Page 93: Tool-Um Backup History
6.10 Tool—UM Backup History 6.10 Tool—UM Backup History The following records for backup that have been performed can be checked on this screen: • Description • Parameters • Completion Status • Date & Time • Total Elapsed Time (HH:MM:SS) This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. PC Programming Manual...
Page 94: Tool-Dxdp All Ous
6.11 Tool—DXDP All OUS 6.11 Tool—DXDP All OUS Sets the status of all DXDP/XDP extension ports to "OUS" simultaneously for the PBX. To set all DXDP/XDP ports to OUS for the PBX Access Tool—DXDP All OUS from the Maintenance Screen tree view. Click OK.
Page 95: Tool-Contact Information
6.12 Tool—Contact information 6.12 Tool—Contact information Dealers can set contact information for the user of the PBX here. When users select this tree menu item, this information will be displayed for the user’s reference. Input the following information, and then click OK. •...
Page 96: Tool-Ut Option Setting
6.13 Tool—UT Option Setting 6.13 Tool—UT Option Setting Option settings can be specified for KX-UT series SIP phones on a system-wide level. Note The following apply when programming in On-line mode only: • To set these parameters, all installed V-UTEXT32 cards must first be set to OUS. For details, see 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 97: Tool-Url Information
6.14 Tool—URL Information 6.14 Tool—URL Information The URL address for downloading the IMAP tool can be specified on this screen. This URL address will be used for the Unified Messaging Plug in download button displayed to users when they view the Unified Message tab of their profile in the User menu.
Page 98: Tool-Svm (Simplified Voice Message)
6.15.2 Tool—SVM (Simplified Voice Message)—Check Current Usage 6.15 Tool—SVM (Simplified Voice Message) 6.15.1 Tool—SVM (Simplified Voice Message)—Delete All Recording Deletes all voice messages recorded by the SVM feature. To delete SVM recording data Access Tool—SVM (Simplified Voice Message)—Delete All Recording. Click OK.
Page 99: Utility
Section 7 Utility This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Utility menu of the Maintenance screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 100: Utility-Diagnosis
7.1.1 Utility—Diagnosis—Card Diagnosis 7.1 Utility—Diagnosis 7.1.1 Utility—Diagnosis—Card Diagnosis Performs diagnostic tests on cards installed in the PBX, to identify the source of problems. If any of the tests listed here returns the result "NG" ("No Good"), contact your dealer. When testing is complete, any cards that were set to OUS status must be returned to INS status if they are to be used again.
Page 101: Utility-Diagnosis-Ping
7.1.2 Utility—Diagnosis—Ping 7.1.2 Utility—Diagnosis—Ping Performs a connection test on network devices. This function sends echo requests to a particular IP address across an IP network, and displays the result of responses and round-trip time. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. To perform a Ping test Enter a specific IP address in the IP Address box.
Page 102: Utility-File
7.2.1 Utility—File—File Transfer PC to PBX 7.2 Utility—File 7.2.1 Utility—File—File Transfer PC to PBX Copies PBX system data files from the connected PC to the System Memory installed in the PBX. Pre-existing files in System Memory Card are overwritten. This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode. To install new main system data that has been copied to the PBX, use the System Reset utility (see 5.3 System Control—System Reset) for DFSYS files.
Page 103: Utility-File-File Transfer Pbx To Pc
7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer PBX to PC 7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer PBX to PC Copies system data files from the System Memory and SD card installed in the PBX to the connected PC. This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode. The files that can be downloaded from the System Memory and SD card are as follows: File Name File Type...
Page 104: Utility-File-File View
7.2.3 Utility—File—File View 7.2.3 Utility—File—File View Displays a list of files in System Memory and SD card. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The name, date and time of creation, and size of files are displayed. This utility can also display information on activation key files stored in the in the System Memory and SD card. The effective date, PFMPR-ID, activation key type, number of activation keys, and expiration date of activation keys are displayed on the Detail screen.
Page 105: Utility-File-File Delete
7.2.4 Utility—File—File Delete 7.2.4 Utility—File—File Delete Allows you to delete files from the System Memory. This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode. The DFSYS system file cannot be deleted by this utility. Note Programme files cannot be deleted if the Program Update feature’s timed update is set, or if an update is currently being performed.
Page 106: Utility-File-Message File Transfer Pc To Pbx
7.2.5 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PC to PBX 7.2.5 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PC to PBX Transfers Outgoing Message (OGM) files from the PC to the System Memory. This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode. Uploaded files are automatically renamed as necessary. If the location specified already contains an OGM, it will be overwritten by the newly uploaded message.
Page 107: Utility-File-Message File Transfer Pbx To Pc
7.2.6 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PBX to PC 7.2.6 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PBX to PC Transfers Outgoing Message (OGM) files from the System Memory to the PC. This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode. To transfer OGMs to the PC From the lower drop-down list, select the messages to transfer.
Page 108: Utility-Log
7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log 7.3 Utility—Log 7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log Collects and displays system error information. Whenever there is a system failure, the PBX stores the error code generated. The connected PC collects all of these codes, along with other information, and displays an explanatory error message. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 109 7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log Sub Code Description Slot Type For physical slots (including physical slots of Expansion Units) – " " (blank) For KX-NS500 virtual slots – "*" (asterisk) Shelf Number • – KX-NS500 unit: 1 – Expansion Unit: 2–4 –...
Page 110: Utility-Log-Syslog
7.3.2 Utility—Log—Syslog 7.3.2 Utility—Log—Syslog Displays a log of system events. Each entry in the log includes the following information: • Type: Describes the type of system event. • Date: The date and time the system event occurred. • Message: Details about the system event. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 111: Utility-Log-Web-Mc Event Log
7.3.3 Utility—Log—Web-MC Event Log 7.3.3 Utility—Log—Web-MC Event Log The Web-MC Event Log retains information about user interaction with Web Maintenance Console. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The items displayed on screen are as follows: Item Description Date The date of the event.
Page 112: Utility-Log-Um System Log
7.3.4 Utility—Log—UM System Log 7.3.4 Utility—Log—UM System Log You can export a log of events from the Unified Messaging system for troubleshooting purposes. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. Click OK to export a UM System Log file. Click Save to save the data to a local file.
Page 113: Utility-Log-Call Control Log
7.3.5 Utility—Log—Call Control Log 7.3.5 Utility—Log—Call Control Log Collects and displays Logical Partitioning Call Control Log information. To show the setting change information for the Logical Partitioning feature, press the Condition button. To show the call restriction status of the Logical Partitioning feature, press the Status button. Condition Item Description...
Page 114: Utility-Monitor/Trace
From the Shelf-Slot No. drop-down list, select the target slot. Each card will be preceded by a 2-digit number, following the pattern "X-Y": • X: Shelf number (1-4) – 1: KX-NS500 basic unit – 2: Expansion Unit1 – 3: Expansion Unit2 –...
Page 115: Utility-Monitor/Trace-V-Ipgw Protocol Trace
7.4.2 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-IPGW Protocol Trace 7.4.2 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-IPGW Protocol Trace This utility collects trace data of protocol activity from V-IPGW16 card. This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode, and requires that the target V-IPGW16 card be set to INS status. To save trace data to the System Memory From the Utility menu, select V-IPGW Protocol Trace.
Page 116: Utility-Monitor/Trace-V-Sipgw Protocol Trace
7.4.3 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-SIPGW Protocol Trace 7.4.3 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-SIPGW Protocol Trace The trace data of protocol activity can be collected from the V-SIPGW16 card and saved to a PC using the V-SIPGW Protocol Trace. This option requires that the target V-SIPGW16 card be set to INS status. This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode.
Page 117: Utility-Monitor/Trace-Cs Status Monitor
7.4.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor 7.4.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor This utility monitors the status of CSs. CSs receive data from other CSs that they are currently synchronised with. Current Sync CS information is displayed for IP-CSs that are in INS status. This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode.
Page 118: Utility-Monitor/Trace-Um System Trace (Internal)
7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—UM System Trace (Internal) 7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—UM System Trace (Internal) Unified Messaging (UM) system processes can be monitored and logged. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The following data can be traced and logged for each UM port, or all UM ports: •...
Page 119: Utility-Monitor/Trace-E1 Signalling Bit Monitor
From the Shelf-Slot No. drop-down list, select the target slot. Each card will be preceded by a 2-digit number, following the pattern "X-Y": • X: Shelf number (1-4) – 1: KX-NS500 basic unit – 2: Expansion Unit1 – 3: Expansion Unit2 –...
Page 120: Utility-Monitor/Trace-E1 Line Trace
From the Shelf-Slot No. drop-down list, select the target slot. Each card will be preceded by a 2-digit number, following the pattern "X-Y": • X: Shelf number (1-4) – 1: KX-NS500 basic unit – 2: Expansion Unit1 – 3: Expansion Unit2 –...
Page 121: Utility-Report
7.5.1 Utility—Report—Digital Trunk Error Report 7.5 Utility—Report 7.5.1 Utility—Report—Digital Trunk Error Report Displays accumulated information on various types of errors occurring on digital trunks. This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode. The value displayed for each error item is the number of times that each error occurred during the time period selected.
Page 122: Utility-Report-Ip Extension Statistical Information
7.5.2 Utility—Report—IP Extension Statistical Information 7.5.2 Utility—Report—IP Extension Statistical Information Displays accumulated statistical information on IP extensions, V-IPEXT32 cards, V-IPCS4 cards, and the DSP card. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The displayed items are as follows: Item Description Collection Started Time...
Page 123: Utility-Report-Um View Reports
7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports 7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports Unified Messaging (UM) system reports can be generated in order to monitor voice mail operations. Reports can be displayed on a PC, printed, or exported. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. To view a report In the View Report tab, select the desired report from the Report Parameters drop-down list.
Page 124 7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports Report Type Description Call Account Report The call account report displays information about outgoing call activity. Information can be shown by UM port or by mailbox. The report includes date, starting time, used port, connection time, called telephone number, call type, exit status of each callout, total callouts number and the connection time for local or long distance call, and total number of outgoing calls.
Page 125 7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports Report Type Description Hourly Statistics Report The hourly statistics report displays information about the number of incoming or outgoing calls, the connected time per hour, etc. This report can be set to be automatically cleared according to scheduled settings. PC Programming Manual...
Page 126: Utility-Report-E-Mail Report
7.5.4 Utility—Report—E-mail Report 7.5.4 Utility—Report—E-mail Report A log of information about e-mail messages sent using the functions of the PBX can be viewed in the E-mail Report. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The information in the report includes the following items for each e-mail message sent: •...
Page 127: Utility-Activation Key Installation
7.6 Utility—Activation Key Installation 7.6 Utility—Activation Key Installation Activation keys for various features of the PBX can be installed using this screen. Activation key files are copied from a PC to the PBX and activated. Use the below procedure to install activation key files to a PBX. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 128: Utility-Email Notification
7.7.1 Utility—Email Notification—Alert 7.7 Utility—Email Notification 7.7.1 Utility—Email Notification—Alert You can specify e-mail addresses that will receive messages regarding the PBX’s status. System Alarm An e-mail message will be sent to the specified address when there is a system alarm. The e-mail message will contain details about the alarm.
Page 129: Utility-Email Notification-System Analysis
7.7.2 Utility—Email Notification—System Analysis 7.7.2 Utility—Email Notification—System Analysis Send a specific log file to the designated e-mail address(es). This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. Check the Log File Type drop-down menu, select a log file to send to the e-mail address. Enter up to 2 e-mail addresses in Email Address 1 and Email Address 2.
Page 130: Utility-Email Notification-Test Email
7.7.3 Utility—Email Notification—Test Email 7.7.3 Utility—Email Notification—Test Email Send a test e-mail to confirm e-mail sending settings are correctly configured. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. Enter up to 2 e-mail addresses in Email Address 1 and Email Address 2. In Subject, enter text to be used as the subject line of the e-mail sent.
Page 131: Utility-Command
7.8.1 Utility—Command—UM Command 7.8 Utility—Command 7.8.1 Utility—Command—UM Command System commands can be sent directly to the Unified Messaging system using the Commands dialogue. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. Follow the steps below to use the Commands dialogue: Enter the desired command, then click RUN.
Page 132: Utility-Um - System Prompts Customisation
7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation 7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation The System Prompts customisation screen is used to view, play, add, or delete system prompts. The programmer can also check the prompt number and text for these prompts. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 133 7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation Starting and Stopping System Prompt Playback Select the desired system prompts. Click Play/Record. Click Play or Stop. PC Programming Manual...
Page 134: Utility-Automatic Two-Way Recording
7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting 7.10 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording 7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting Specify the extensions of supervisors that will control the Automatic Two-way Recording feature for agent extensions. These settings may be changed by a programmer with a User (Administrator) account. Click Add/Delete.
Page 135: Utility-Automatic Two-Way Recording-Extension Setting
7.10.2 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting 7.10.2 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting Specify the Automatic Two-way Recording settings for each supervisor. These settings may be changed by a programmer with a User (Administrator) account. From the Select a Supervisor drop-down list, select a supervisor (specified in 7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting).
Page 136: Utility-Automatic Two-Way Recording-Extension Setting List
7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List 7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List In this list you can view the settings of extensions that are programmed to have calls recorded by the Automatic Two-way Recording feature. Information for each extension, including the extension’s supervisor, UM Group number, and Automatic Two-way Recording destination mailbox is displayed.
Page 137: External Call
7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List Maintenance Console Location 7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List Feature Guide References 3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager External Call Specifies whether trunk calls for the extension are automatically recorded. Value Range On, Off Maintenance Console Location 7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List Feature Guide References...
Page 138 7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List PC Programming Manual References 7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting Feature Guide References 3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager Mailbox Number Indicates the Unified Messaging mailbox where two-way recordings will be stored (reference only). Value Range Mailbox number Maintenance Console Location 7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List...
Page 139: Utility-Automatic Two-Way Recording-Maintenance
7.10.4 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Maintenance 7.10.4 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Maintenance Automatic Two-way Recording can be enabled or disabled, or set to record until a specified date and time by a programmer with a User (Administrator) account. To start Automatic Two-way Recording, click Start. The button will change to display Stop. Two-way recording for all designated extensions will continue until one of the following occurs: •...
Page 140: Utility-Um - System Maintenance
7.11 Utility—UM - System Maintenance 7.11 Utility—UM - System Maintenance Programme settings for Unified Messaging (UM) system maintenance. System Maintenance Mode Specifies whether to enable or disable System Maintenance Mode. System Maintenance Start Time Specifies the System Maintenance start time. After specifying the settings on this screen, click OK.
Page 141: Utility-Cs-Web Connection
7.12 Utility—CS-Web Connection 7.12 Utility—CS-Web Connection You can specify the URL of the Super Master CS for your system, which will be used for accessing online CS-Web system programming. For details about the Super Master CS and setting up SIP-CSs, refer to the SIP-CS Installation Guide.
Page 142 7.12 Utility—CS-Web Connection PC Programming Manual...
Page 143: Users
Section 8 Users This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Users menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 144: Users-User Profiles
8.1 Users—User Profiles 8.1 Users—User Profiles Manage PBX settings on a per-user level. Information for each user account is displayed and can be added, edited, or and deleted by a User (Administrator) or Installer level account. Note • For User (Administrator) accounts to change User (User) account settings, the Installer account must use the Screen Customise tool to allow User (Administrator) accounts to view the Users—User Profiles screen.
Page 145 8.1 Users—User Profiles Item Description FWD/DND setting - call from Ext. Specifies the FWD/DND setting for calls from extensions. Mode FWD setting - call from Ext. Specifies the FWD destination for calls from extensions. Destination For settings and details for FWD/DND items, refer to the following: •...
Page 146: Users-User Profiles-Advanced Setting
8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting When User (User) level accounts access their user profiles, they may view and edit items for their account as explained in 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User. In addition, some advanced settings can also be programmed by users.
Page 147 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting Maintenance Console Location 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting Feature Guide References 3.2.2.6 Call Transfer Scenario Call Transfer Status—VIP Filter Specifies whether calls from certain telephone numbers will be transferred directly to a specified extension or telephone number. Note This setting can only be set to "Enable"...
Page 148 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting Maintenance Console Location 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting Feature Guide References 3.2.2.6 Call Transfer Scenario Call Transfer Status—Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu Select a Custom Service from the drop-down menu if "Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu" is selected Call Transfer Status—Selection.
Page 149 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting Call Transfer Status—Transfer to specified telephone number 2, 3, 4, 5 (Selection/Other) If "None" or "Call screening" is selected for Call Transfer Status—Selection, and the call could not be transferred to the number specified in Call Transfer Status—Transfer to specified telephone number - 1, the call will be transferred according to these settings for this scenario, in numerical order of priority.
Page 150 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting Note More than one option can be selected. Value Range Leave a Message: Allows the caller to record a message. Transfer to a covering extension: Transfers the caller to a covering extension. Page the mailbox owner by intercom paging: Pages the subscriber by intercom. Transfer to operator: Transfers the caller to an operator.
Page 151: Users-Add User
8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User 8.2 Users—Add User 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User The Add User—Single User screen provides a method to create user accounts and establish PBX settings on a per-user level. When adding a user, the following settings can be specified. This screen will also be displayed with information already entered when editing an existing user.
Page 152 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User Contact Item Description Extension No. Select an extension for the user from the drop-down list. Device Displays the device type of the selected extension. Extension PIN* Specifies the user’s extension PIN. Specifies the user’s Direct Dial In (DDI) number. Fax* Specifies the user’s fax number.
Page 153 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User Item Description Prompt Registration* Click Prompt Registration to open the User Prompt Registration screen. The following prompts can be recorded in this screen: • Mailbox owner name • Personal greetings (No Answer, Busy, After Hour, Caller ID Greeting, Temporary Greeting and Absent Message) •...
Page 154 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User Item Description Advanced setting* Click to view the selected mailbox’s settings. See 20.1 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings. Note When User (User) level accounts access these settings, additional items are displayed. See 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting. Unified Messaging Click to open a new window in your Web browser and access the download Plug in site for the IMAP Session Controller software.
Page 155: Users-Add User-Multiple Users
8.2.2 Users—Add User—Multiple Users 8.2.2 Users—Add User—Multiple Users The Add User—Multiple Users screen provides a method to create multiple user profiles for a range of extensions at one time. In the From and To fields, specify the range of extensions to create profiles for. Select the Create mailboxes with the same number as the extensions check box if you want to create Unified Messaging mailboxes whose mailbox numbers are the same as the assigned extension numbers.
Page 156: Users-Automatic Two-Way Recording
8.3.1 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Edit a Recording 8.3 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording This screen is accessible only by users designated as Automatic Two-way Recording supervisors. See 7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. 8.3.1 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Edit a Recording On this screen, a user designated as a supervisor may change Automatic Two-way Recording settings for extensions they are supervising.
Page 157: Users-Automatic Two-Way Recording-Record List
8.3.2 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Record List 8.3.2 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Record List Users designated as supervisors can view and play messages recorded using the Automatic Two-way Recording feature. Select one or more mailboxes, and click OK. Messages recorded in the selected mailbox(es) will be displayed. You can filter the list of messages displayed or play a message.
Page 158: Users-Icdg Management
8.4.1 Users—ICDG Management—Group Monitor 8.4 Users—ICDG Management This screen is accessible only by users designated as an ACD supervisor. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. 8.4.1 Users—ICDG Management—Group Monitor Description Users designated as an ACD supervisor can specify an ICD group to monitor, set monitoring conditions, and begin monitoring.
Page 159 8.4.1 Users—ICDG Management—Group Monitor Maintenance Console Location 8.4.1 Users—ICDG Management—Group Monitor Feature Guide References 2.2.2.9 Supervisory Feature (ACD) Basic Settings—Select ICD Group Selects the ICD groups to be managed by the ACD supervisor, from a drop-down list. Value Range ICD groups Maintenance Console Location 8.4.1 Users—ICDG Management—Group Monitor Feature Guide References...
Page 160 8.4.1 Users—ICDG Management—Group Monitor Feature Guide References 2.2.2.9 Supervisory Feature (ACD) Options—Highlighted Display Settings—Waiting Time (0-10 min/10 sec) Specifies the waiting time after which calls are highlighted on the monitor screen. When this setting is set to "0", all waiting calls are highlighted. Value Range 0–10’00 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 161: Users-Icdg Management-Acd Report
8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Description On this screen, users designated as an ACD supervisor can create ACD reports on ICD groups after filtering according to group, agent, or call. Filtering types are separated by tabs. Supervisor selection Selects the ACD supervisor from a drop-down list.
Page 162 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Feature Guide References 2.2.2.9 Supervisory Feature (ACD) Group Group—View Report To display a report according to groups, follow the procedure below. This feature requires the Call Centre Feature Enhancement activation key. If this activation key is not installed, the View Report button is greyed out.
Page 163 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Item Description Max. Waiting Calls The maximum number of calls waiting in the queue of the target ICD group. Reports can be outputted in the following 3 ways. • Graph: Click the Graph button to display the report in graph form on the ACD Report - Group Graph screen.
Page 164 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Feature Guide References 2.2.2.9 Supervisory Feature (ACD) Group—Filter Settings—Select Period Specifies the target period for the report. Value Range Yesterday, Last Week, Last Month, Today, This Week, This Month, Custom Period If Custom Period is selected, set Start Date/Start Time/End Date/End Time also. Maintenance Console Location 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Feature Guide References...
Page 165 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Maintenance Console Location 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Feature Guide References 2.2.2.9 Supervisory Feature (ACD) Agent—Filter Settings—View Mode Selects the monitoring view mode from a drop-down list. Value Range Agent, Hour , Day, Date, Month If Hour is selected, set the monitoring range for the target group (0:00–23:59). Maintenance Console Location 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Feature Guide References...
Page 166 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Maintenance Console Location 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Feature Guide References 2.2.2.9 Supervisory Feature (ACD) Call Call—View Report To display a report according to calls, follow the procedure below. This feature requires the Call Centre Feature Enhancement activation key. If this activation key is not installed, the View Report button is greyed out. Enter the report output conditions and click the View Report button.
Page 167 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Call—Filter Settings—Select Group Follow the procedure below to select the target group for creating a report. Click the Select button. Click the ICD group name you want to analyse from the ICD group names displayed on the Available Group for ACD Report window.
Page 168 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Maintenance Console Location 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Feature Guide References 2.2.2.9 Supervisory Feature (ACD) PC Programming Manual...
Page 169: Pbx Configuration-[1] Configuration
Section 9 PBX Configuration—[1] Configuration This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Configuration menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 170: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot
9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot The operating characteristics associated with each service card can be programmed. Move the mouse pointer over an installed card to display the menu of options for that card. To view a summary of status and versions for all cards installed in the PBX, click the Slot Summary button (see 9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property).
Page 171 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot To remove a card from the PBX Move the mouse pointer over the card to remove. A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer. Select Delete. Click OK to confirm. The card will be removed. Note The cards in Slot No.1-No.3 of the Basic Unit and the card in Slot No.1 of the Expansion Unit cannot be deleted because these cards are pre-installed.
Page 172 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot Card Types Supported by KX-NS500 Max. No/ Max. No/Line Installation Type Card Type Card Programming Card Type Type 9.11 PBX V-IPGW16: Virtual Configuration—[1-1] 16-Channel VoIP Configuration—Slot Gateway Card —V-IPGW—Shelf Property (Trunk) 9.11 PBX V-SIPGW16: Virtual Configuration—[1-1] 16-Channel SIP Trunk Configuration—Slot...
Page 173 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot Max. No/ Max. No/Line Installation Type Card Type Card Programming Card Type Type 9.23 PBX LOCT6: 6-port Configuration—[1-1] Analogue Trunk ports Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card (Trunk) Property - PRI type PRI30/E1: PRI30 Option - Trunk / 9.28 PBX Trunk Card...
Page 174 4.5 Physical Trunk and Extension Cards For information about cards supported by Expansion Units, see System Components for Expansion Unit in the KX-NS500 Installation Manual. Common Programming Reference Items When programming settings for cards, extensions, and other devices using Web Maintenance Console,...
Page 175 Indicates the physical or virtual shelf where the card, extension, or device is located in the PBX. • Shelf "1" is the physical shelf of the KX-NS500 PBX. • Shelf "2" corresponds to the Expansion unit connected to EXP-M port 1.
Page 176: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-System Property
9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main 9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main The properties of the PBX system can be specified. Main DSP CODEC G.711 only (SIP extension) Specifies whether or not to only use the G.711 codec for SIP extension calls. Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 177: System Status
9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main Value Range 0–300 Maintenance Console Location 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main PC Programming Manual References 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Port Property—Option— System Speed Dial Download System Status CPU Usage Displays the system CPU’s current processor load, expressed as a percentage of total capacity (reference only).
Page 178 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main V-IPGW Call Signalling Model Specifies whether to carry out a call control (H.225) process directly between the cards or through a gatekeeper. Value Range Direct, GateKeeper Maintenance Console Location 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main Gatekeeper Connection Checking Interval (*60s) Specifies the time between periodic checks of connection to the gatekeeper.
Page 179 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main Maintenance Console Location 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main Primary Gatekeeper IP Address Specifies the IP address of the primary gatekeeper. Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main Primary Gatekeeper Port Number Specifies the port number of the primary gatekeeper.
Page 180 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main RAS Port Number Specifies the port number for the H.225 protocol (RAS) in an H.323 protocol suite. Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main QSIG Connectionless Tunneling TCP Port Number Specifies the TCP port number for connectionless tunnelling between gateway devices at different locations in a QSIG network.
Page 181 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main Maintenance Console Location 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main V-IPGW–GW Settings–Main GW Name Specifies the name of the destination gateway device for programming reference. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main GW IP Address Specifies the IP address of the destination gateway device.
Page 182 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main Protocol Specifies the type of protocol for connectionless tunnelling between gateway devices at different locations in a QSIG network. Value Range TCP, UDP Maintenance Console Location 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main Progress Tone Send Mode Specifies whether to send call progress tones to the destination.
Page 183 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main Packet Sampling Time (G.711A) Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound. Value Range 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main Packet Sampling Time (G.711Mu)
Page 184 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main FAX Sending Method Specifies the method of transporting the fax signal. Value Range G.711 Inband, T.38 Maintenance Console Location 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main Maximum Bit Rate Specifies the maximum bit rate of the fax signal.
Page 185 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main Value Range Inband, Outband (RFC2833), Outband (H.245) Maintenance Console Location 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main Payload Type Specifies the payload type for DTMF tones using RFC2833. Programming this parameter is only necessary if DTMF is set to Outband (RFC2833). Value Range 96–127 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 186 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main Maintenance Console Location 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for T.30 messages Specifies the redundancy count for T.30 messages when using the T.38 protocol. Value Range 0–7 Maintenance Console Location 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for data Specifies the redundancy count for data when using the T.38 protocol.
Page 187 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main Remaining Number of Digits Specifies the number of digits to be dialled following the leading number to access the destination. Value Range 0–29 Maintenance Console Location 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main GW No./GW Group Selection Specifies the type of destination when making calls: a gateway device or a gateway group.
Page 188: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-System Property-Site
9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site The properties of the PBX site can be specified. When you place the mouse cursor over the System Property button and click the Site button, the Main and NSVM buttons are displayed. Click a button to open that site property screen.
Page 189 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Maintenance Console Location 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site MAC Address Indicates the MAC address of the PBX (reference only). Value Range 00:00:00:00:00:00–FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF Maintenance Console Location 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site PBX Version Indicates the software version of the PBX (reference only). Value Range 0000.00000 - 9999.99999 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 190 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Value Range Days, Hours and Minutes Maintenance Console Location 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Storage Memory Size Indicates the size of the installed storage memory card (reference only). Value Range Card Size Maintenance Console Location 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Area ID for logical partition Specifies the area ID for the Logical Partitioning feature.
Page 191 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site P2P Group Name Indicates the selected peer-to-peer group’s name (reference only). Value Range P2P Group Name Maintenance Console Location 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Feature Guide References 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection IP Terminal Registration Mode Specifies the IP terminal registration mode for registering IP telephones to the PBX.
Page 192 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Value Range 0–64 Maintenance Console Location 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Send Music On Hold to IP trunk (for P2P conversation) Enables the sending of hold music to an IP trunk during a P2P connection call between an IP extension and IP trunk.
Page 193 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Jitter Buffer Delay Min. for Voice Specifies the minimum size of the jitter buffer for voice communications. Value Range 0–200 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Jitter Buffer Delay Max. for Voice Specifies the maximum size of the jitter buffer for voice communications.
Page 194 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Maintenance Console Location 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Jitter Buffer Delay Max. for FAX Specifies the maximum size of the jitter buffer for fax communications. Value Range 0–200 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Jitter Buffer Delay Init.
Page 195 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Value Range -39– -6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 1 (ON) Specifies the length of time that the PBX detects the CNG signal. Value Range 20–5000 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 2 (OFF)
Page 196 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site CED Signal Fixation Detection Time Specifies the minimum length of time required for the CED (called station identification) signal to be detected by the PBX. Value Range 50 ´ n (n=1–100) ms Maintenance Console Location 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 1 (ON) - SIP Extension Specifies the length of time that the PBX detects the CNG signal for SIP extensions.
Page 197 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Maintenance Console Location 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site CED Signal Fixation Detection Time - SIP Extension Specifies the minimum length of time required for the CED (called station identification) signal to be detected by the PBX for SIP extensions. Value Range 50 ´...
Page 198 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site T38 FAX Transmit Level Mu-Law - SIP Extension Specifies the transmission level of G3 fax signals after being converted from T.38 protocol packets, when the codec used is G.711Mu for SIP extensions. Value Range -7–8 dB Maintenance Console Location 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Port Number...
Page 199 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site UDP Port No. for SIP Extension Server Specifies the UDP port number used for the SIP Extension server. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value. Value Range 1024–65535 Maintenance Console Location 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Feature Guide References...
Page 200 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Maintenance Console Location 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection Data Transmission Protocol (HTTPS) Port No. for SIP-MLT Specifies the HTTPS port of the PBX-side ACS for data communication with KX-UT series SIP phones. Value Range 0–65535 (Setting "0"...
Page 201 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Value Range 1024–65535 Maintenance Console Location 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 9— Built-in Communication Assistant 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 9— Built-in Communication Assistant Feature Guide References 2.26.2 CA (Communication Assistant) LAN Status...
Page 202 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection IP Extension—Keep Alive Packet Type Specifies the type of Keep Alive packets to be sent out for remote connections for IP extensions. Value Range Blank UDP, None Maintenance Console Location...
Page 203 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection UT Extension—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTP) Port No. Specifies the outside-facing HTTP port of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections. Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection UT Extension—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTPS) Port No.
Page 204 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site UT Extension—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTPS) Port No. for Network Survivability Specifies the outside-facing HTTPS port of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections. This setting specifies the port number used for the secondary server for network survivability. Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 205 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection UT Extension—Keep Alive Packet Type Specifies the type of Keep Alive packets to be sent out for remote connections. Value Range Register, Blank UDP, None Maintenance Console Location...
Page 206 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection UT Extension—PERIODIC Ability Specifies whether alive monitoring is performed for connected remote extensions. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection UT Extension—PERIODIC Packet Sending Interval Time (s) Specifies the polling interval for alive monitoring when PERIODIC Ability is set to Enable.
Page 207 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Option—NAT - SIP Proxy Server IP Address Specifies the outside-facing IP address or host name of the network gateway connected to the SIP proxy server. If using a separate IP address from Common—NAT - External IP Address, configure this setting. Value Range Blank, 1.0.0.1–223.255.255.254 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 208: Sip Extension
9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Value Range Blank, 1.0.0.1–223.255.255.254 Maintenance Console Location 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection SIP Extension SIP Location Hold Time Max. Specifies the maximum length of time that the PBX holds information on the location of SIP Extensions. Value Range 10–3600 s Maintenance Console Location...
Page 209 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Maintenance Console Location 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension SIP Session Timer Min. Specifies the minimum length of time that the PBX waits before disconnecting SIP sessions when no communication is detected.
Page 210 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTPS) Port No. Specifies the outside-facing HTTPS port of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections. Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Feature Guide References...
Page 211 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP Proxy Server IP Address Specifies the outside-facing IP address or host name of the network gateway connected to the SIP proxy server.
Page 212 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - NTP Server Port No. Specifies the outside-facing port of the network gateway connected to the NTP server. Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - Keep Alive Packet...
Page 213 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP Register Expire Time (s) Specifies the length of time that will elapse before the current registration expires. Note This setting is available only when NAT - Keep Alive Packet Type is set to "Register". Value Range 10–3600 s Maintenance Console Location...
Page 214 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Setting parameters for Networking Survivability, assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTPS) Port No. Specifies the outside-facing HTTPS port of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections that is used when the gateway specified in Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT is not available. Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 215 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Echo Cancellation Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time. Value Range OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site DSP Digital Gain (Down) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path. Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location...
Page 216 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Maintenance Console Location 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site DSP Conference DSP Conference Priority Specifies the Conference Priority (the conference resource you want to use). Value Range Preferential: Default conference resource Alternative: Conference resource on DSP card Maintenance Console Location 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site DSP Digital Gain (Up) on V-IPEXT side for conference...
Page 217 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site DSP Digital Gain (Up) on Multisite GW side for conference Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path for conference calls using a gateway between sites. Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Echo Cancellation Ability on TDM side for conference Specifies the echo canceller ability time for conferencing using TDM circuit mode communication.
Page 218 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Maintenance Console Location 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site NLP Setting on TDM side for conference Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting for conferencing using TDM circuit mode communication. Value Range Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong Maintenance Console Location 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site PC Programming Manual...
Page 219: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-System Property-Slot Summary
9.2.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Slot Summary 9.2.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Slot Summary Summary information is displayed for all cards installed in the PBX. Click one of the following tabs to view a summary of the shelf in the PBX: • Physical Shelf: View the physical card shelf.
Page 220 9.2.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Slot Summary Maintenance Console Location 9.2.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Slot Summary PC Programming Manual References 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot Version Indicates the software version of the installed card (reference only). Value Range Version number Maintenance Console Location 9.2.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Slot Summary PC Programming Manual References 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot...
Page 221 9.2.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Slot Summary Maintenance Console Location 9.2.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Slot Summary PC Programming Manual References 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot Status Indicates the card status (reference only). Value Range INS: The card is in service. OUS: The card is out of service. Fault: The card is not communicating with the network.
Page 222: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-System Property-Nsvm
9.2.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—NSVM 9.2.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—NSVM Settings related to audio quality and sound detection for the PBX site can be specified. Echo Cancellation Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time. Value Range OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.2.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—NSVM DSP Digital Gain (Down)
Page 223 9.2.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—NSVM NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality. Value Range Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong Maintenance Console Location 9.2.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—NSVM AGC enable for Tx signal Specifies whether AGC is activated or not for the Transmit signal. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 224 9.2.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—NSVM Maintenance Console Location 9.2.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—NSVM The maximum allowable AGC gain for TX signal Specifies the maximum allowable AGC gain for the Transmit signal. Value Range 0 dB - 40 dB Maintenance Console Location 9.2.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—NSVM The minimum allowable AGC gain for TX signal Specifies the minimum allowable AGC gain for the Transmit signal.
Page 225 9.2.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—NSVM Value Range Off, On Maintenance Console Location 9.2.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—NSVM SNS On/Off for Packet-to-PCM path Specifies whether SNS is on or off for the Packet-to-PCM path. Value Range Off, On Maintenance Console Location 9.2.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—NSVM SNS level for Packet-to-PCM path Specifies the SNS level for the Packet-to-PCM path.
Page 226 9.2.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—NSVM Maintenance Console Location 9.2.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—NSVM CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 1 (ON) Specifies the length of time that the PBX detects the CNG signal. Value Range 20–5000 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.2.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—NSVM CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 2 (OFF) Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits until another CNG signal is detected.
Page 227 9.2.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—NSVM Value Range -38 dBm 0 - -20 dBm 0 Maintenance Console Location 9.2.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—NSVM Silence Detection Rx Threshold Specifies the silence detection receiving threshold. Value Range -38 dBm 0 - -20 dBm 0 Maintenance Console Location 9.2.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—NSVM Maximum Silence Time...
Page 228 9.2.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—NSVM Maximum Cyclic Tone Time Specifies the length of time of a continuing cyclic tone that the PBX will detect as the end of a call. Value Range 1000–60000 (ms) Maintenance Console Location 9.2.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—NSVM PC Programming Manual...
Page 229: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Activation Key Status
9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status Refreshes and displays information about activation keys provided by any activation key files in the System Memory and by pre-installed activation keys on the mother board. To access this screen, click the Activation Key button on the Configuration—Slot main screen.
Page 230 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status Maintenance Console Location 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status Activated Feature Indicates the type of activation keys (reference only). Note that the types of activation keys are subject to change without notice. For CA activation keys, refer to the documentation for CA.
Page 231 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status Features in total Indicates the total number of channels (or CA users) provided by the mother board and activation key files in the System Memory (reference only).
Page 232: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Voip Property
9.4.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Ext) Setting 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property 9.4.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Ext) Setting Allows you to install or remove IP extension cards by entering the number of IP extensions (IP-PT, UT/UDT or SIP extension) and to set IP Terminal Registration Mode. When you place the mouse cursor over the VoIP Property button on the Slot screen, click the VoIP(Ext) Setting button to open the VoIP(Ext) Setting screen.
Page 233 9.4.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Ext) Setting Value Range 0-128 Maintenance Console Location 9.4.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Ext) Setting Number of IP Extensions—Number of cards (Max.4)—V-IPEXT32 Indicates the number of installed V-IPEXT32 cards (reference only). Value Range Maintenance Console Location 9.4.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Ext) Setting Number of IP Extensions—Number of cards (Max.4)—V-UTEXT32 Indicates the number of installed V-UTEXT32 cards (reference only).
Page 234 9.4.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Ext) Setting IP Terminal Registration Mode Specifies the IP Terminal registration mode for registering IP telephones to the PBX. Value Range Manual, Full Automatic, Extension Number Input Maintenance Console Location 9.4.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Ext) Setting PC Programming Manual...
Page 235: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Voip Property-Voip (Trunk) Setting
9.4.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Trunk) Setting 9.4.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Trunk) Setting Allows you to add new SIP trunk accounts by entering the number of SIP trunk port and some SIP trunk settings. When you place the mouse cursor over the VoIP Property button on the Slot screen, click the VoIP (Trunk) Setting button to open the VoIP (Trunk) Setting screen.
Page 236 9.4.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Trunk) Setting Account Setting—Authentication Password (32 characters) Specifies the authentication password used for registration with the SIP provider. Value Range Max. 32 characters Maintenance Console Location 9.4.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Trunk) Setting Account Setting—SIP Server Name / Outbound Proxy Name (Max.100 characters) Specifies the domain name of the SIP proxy server.
Page 237 9.4.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Trunk) Setting Property Setting—Select Service Provider Select the SIP service provider after importing SIP service provider file. Value Range Max. 100 characters Maintenance Console Location 9.4.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Trunk) Setting Property Setting—Register Ability Specifies whether to send the REGISTER message to the SIP server.
Page 238 9.4.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Trunk) Setting Maintenance Console Location 9.4.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Trunk) Setting Property Setting—Anonymous format in "From" header Specifies the format of the "From" header when not sending caller ID. Value Range Display name and SIP-URI, Display name only Note If "Display name and SIP-URI"...
Page 239: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Um Card Property
9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property The properties of the Unified Messaging (UM) system can be specified. Place the mouse cursor over the UM Property button on the Slot screen and click the Card Property button to open the UM Card Property screen.
Page 240 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality. Value Range Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property FAX Detection Ability Enables the use of the FAX Detection Ability feature.
Page 241 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property CNG Signal Fixation Detection Counter Specifies the number of times the CNG signal must be detected before the PBX proceeds the fax operation. Value Range 1–3 Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property CNG Signal Fixation Detection Pattern Specifies whether or not the Unified Messaging system will respond to CNG signals.
Page 242: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Um Port Property
9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property 9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property The properties of the Unified Messaging (UM) system’s ports can be specified. Place the mouse cursor over the UM Property button on the Slot screen and click the Port Property button to open the UM Port Property screen.
Page 243: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Port Property-Port Type View
9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Port Type View 9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Port Type View Displays the number of connected telephones, devices, and Cell Stations (CSs). This screen can be accessed from the Port Property screen of any extension cards in use in the PBX system, including extension cards of Expansion Units.
Page 244: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Sipgw-Shelf Property
9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property 9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property Common settings for all of the V-SIPGW cards installed in the Virtual Shelf can be programmed. Icon Description In this section, the following icons show the different parameter type. Icon Description for Parameter Type Manual programming is compulsory under certain conditions.
Page 245 9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property Maintenance Console Location 9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property NAT - Keep Alive Packet Sending Ability Specifies whether to send Keep Alive packets in order to maintain the NAT binding information. This setting may be compulsory depending on the network conditions. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 246 9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property STUN Ability Specifies whether to open a protocol port of the STUN server to enable STUN feature. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property STUN Client Port Number Specifies the port number of the PBX used for communications with the STUN server. Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 247 9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property Maintenance Console Location 9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property Symmetric Response Routing Ability Enables this feature to request that the SIP server sends the response back to the source IP address and port from which the request originated. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 248 9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property SIP QoS-ToS Priority Specifies the priority level in the ToS field when "ToS" is selected in SIP QoS Ability. Value Range 0–7 Maintenance Console Location 9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property SIP QoS-ToS Type Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field when "ToS" is selected in SIP QoS Ability.
Page 249 9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property Value Range 40–255 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property PC Programming Manual...
Page 250: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Sipgw-Card Property
9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Card Property 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Card Property Common card settings for all of the V-SIPGW cards installed in the Virtual Shelf can be programmed. DNS SRV Record Resolve Ability Specifies whether to request that the DNS server translates domain names into IP addresses using the DNS SRV record.
Page 251: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Sipgw-Port Property
9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Programming Port Properties Some of the parameters can be automatically programmed by selecting the desired SIP provider for each virtual SIP gateway port. Icon Description In this section, the following icons show the different parameter type. Icon Description for Parameter Type Programmed automatically by selecting the desired SIP provider in Select Provider.
Page 252 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Ensure that the Trunk Adaptor is connected to the network and a power supply, and that all ports to be set are OUS. Click Trunk Adaptor. The Trunk Adaptor List screen is displayed. Enter a name (20 characters or less) for the Trunk Adaptor in Trunk Adaptor Name. Enter the Trunk Adaptor’s IP address in Trunk Adaptor IP Address.
Page 253 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range SIP Provider, Trunk Adaptor Maintenance Console Location 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.3.1 Trunk Adaptor Connection Trunk Property Specifies the networking type of each SIP trunk. Note Connection Attribute is set to "Trunk Adaptor" for the port, only "Public" will be available for this setting. Value Range Public, VPN Maintenance Console Location...
Page 254 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property SIP Server Name Specifies the domain name of the SIP proxy server. Note Specify the domain name of the outbound proxy server, if provided by the SIP provider. Value Range Max.
Page 255 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range Max. 100 characters Maintenance Console Location 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Subscriber Number Specifies the number used as the CLIP number. Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, , and #) Maintenance Console Location 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property P2P Group Specifies the peer-to-peer group of the IP-Trunk.
Page 256 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection Account The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port.
Page 257 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Register The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Connection Indicates the port status.
Page 258 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Registrar Server Name Specifies the domain name of the SIP server. Value Range Max. 100 characters Maintenance Console Location 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Registrar Server IP Address Specifies the IP address of the SIP server.
Page 259 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port.
Page 260 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Option The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Connection Indicates the port status.
Page 261 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range UPDATE, re-INVITE Maintenance Console Location 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Session Incoming Refresher Request Specifies the type of method used for establishing the session interval. Value Range UAC, UAS Maintenance Console Location 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property SIP 200 Response Timer (*100 ms) Specifies the amount of time to wait for a SIP 200 (OK) response when establishing a connection between two parties.
Page 262 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Failover Timer (INVITE) Specifies the amount of time to wait for a response for an INVITE request. Value Range 0–30 s Maintenance Console Location 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Calling Party The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference.
Page 263 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property From Header—SIP-URI Specifies the complete SIP-URI address of the From header. The configuration in From Header—User Part will be invalid if this parameter is set. Value Range Max.
Page 264 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Remove Digit Specifies the number of leading digits of the CLIP number to be removed. This setting is compulsory when PBX-CLIP is selected in From Header—User Part or P-Preferred-Identity Header—User Part. Value Range 0–32 Maintenance Console Location 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Additional Dial Specifies the number to be added to the CLIP number in the place of the removed digits.
Page 265 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Note • To copy values from one location to another, click Copy to. • If the Channel Attribute setting of the port is "Additional", the setting cannot be changed. Maintenance Console Location 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Called Party The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference.
Page 266 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property MEX - Prefix for Incoming Specifies the Mobile Device Access prefix for incoming calls from MEX-enabled mobile devices. Value Range Max. 16 characters Maintenance Console Location 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property MEX - Prefix for Outgoing Specifies the Mobile Device Access outgoing prefix for calls made to MEX-enabled mobile devices.
Page 267 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property IP Codec Priority—1st, 2nd, 3rd Specifies the priority of the codecs to be used. None is only available for 2nd and 3rd priorities. Value Range G.711A, G.711Mu, G.729A, None Maintenance Console Location 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Packet Sampling Time (G.711A)
Page 268 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Voice Activity Detection for G.711 Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for the G.711 codec. This feature conserves bandwidth by detecting silent periods during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from being sent to the network. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 269 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property FAX Detection Ability Enables the use of the FAX Detection Ability feature. This feature enables end-to-end fax signal relay when the other party prefers a codec other than G.711. This feature functions only if the other party supports G.711. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 270 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property RTP QoS Ability Specifies the type of value to be stored in the ToS field in the IP header. Value Range ToS, DSCP, HEX Maintenance Console Location 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property RTP QoS-ToS Priority Specifies the priority level in the ToS field.
Page 271 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range 00–FF Maintenance Console Location 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property RTCP Packet Sending Ability Specifies whether to enable each port to send RTCP packets. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property RTCP Packet Interval Specifies the interval time until the next RTCP packet is sent.
Page 272 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property T38 FAX Max Datagram Specifies the maximum datagram size when using the T.38 protocol.
Page 273 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property T38 FAX Rate Management Method Specifies the rate management method when using the T.38 protocol. Value Range Transferred TCF, Local TCF Maintenance Console Location 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Reject T.38 Request from Network Specifies whether T.38 protocol data requests are rejected or accepted.
Page 274 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property T38 FAX QoS Available Specifies the type of value to be stored in the ToS field in the IP header when using the T.38 protocol. Value Range ToS, DSCP, HEX Maintenance Console Location 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property...
Page 275 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property T38 FAX QoS-HEX Specifies the value in the ToS field by a hexadecimal number when using the T.38 protocol. This setting is compulsory when HEX is selected in T38 FAX QoS Available. Value Range 00–FF Maintenance Console Location 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference.
Page 276 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property DSP Digital Gain (Up) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path. Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain.
Page 277 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property CLIP (Receive) Specify where caller information about an incoming call is obtained: • Prioritised: P-Asserted-Identity®P-Preferred-Identity®From Header • Fixed: From Header Value Range P-Asserted-Identity Header, From Header Note •...
Page 278 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Blind Transfer (REFER) Specifies whether to allow blind transfers using REFER. Value Range Yes, No Maintenance Console Location 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Attended Transfer (REFER) Specifies whether to allow attended transfers using REFER. Value Range Yes, No Maintenance Console Location...
Page 279 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property PC Programming Manual...
Page 280: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Ipgw-Shelf Property
9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property Common settings for all of the V-IPGW cards installed in the Virtual Shelf can be programmed. Main Gatekeeper Available Specifies whether to use a gatekeeper. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property RTCP Packet Sending Ability Specifies whether to enable the PBX to send RTCP packets.
Page 281 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property RTP QoS-ToS Priority Specifies the priority level in the ToS field. Value Range 0–7 Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property RTP QoS-ToS Type Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field. Value Range Normal, Monetary Cost, Reliability, Throughput, Delay Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property...
Page 282 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property T38 FAX QoS-ToS Priority Specifies the priority level in the ToS field when using the T.38 protocol. Value Range 0–7 Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property T38 FAX QoS-ToS Type Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field when using the T.38 protocol.
Page 283 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property Echo Canceller Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time. Value Range OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) DSP Digital Gain (Down) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.
Page 284 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality. Value Range Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property Feature Guide References...
Page 285: Incoming Call
9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property Trunk Property Indicates the networking type of each trunk. Value Range Public, Private, VPN Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property Outgoing Call First-digit Timer (T302-1) Specifies the length of time within which the first digit of a dial number must be dialled after seizing a virtual IP trunk.
Page 286 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property Voice Codec Priority 1st Specifies the highest priority codec type. For fax communications, it is necessary to specify G.711A or G. 711Mu for this parameter. Value Range G.711A, G.711Mu, G.729A Maintenance Console Location...
Page 287 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property Packet Sampling Time for G.711Mu Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound. Value Range 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms Maintenance Console Location...
Page 288 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property Maximum Bit Rate Specifies the maximum bit rate of the fax signal. Value Range No Speed Limit, 2400 bps, 4800 bps, 7200 bps, 9600 bps, 12000 bps, 14400 bps Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property DTMF...
Page 289 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for T.30 messages Specifies the redundancy count for T.30 messages when using the T.38 protocol. Value Range 0–7 Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for data...
Page 290 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property T302 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call. Applies to overlap receiving. Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property T303 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message.
Page 291 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property T309 Specifies the length of time after which the PBX tries to disconnect the data link, before disconnecting the call. Value Range 0–3000 ´...
Page 292 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property T318 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Resume message. Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property T319 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Suspend message. Value Range 0–600 ´...
Page 293 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property PC Programming Manual...
Page 294: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Ipgw-Shelf Property-Gk Settings
9.11.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property—GK Settings 9.11.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property—GK Settings Gatekeeper registration information can be programmed. Destination Number Specifies a telephone number to register with a gatekeeper. Value Range Max. 30 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 9.11.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property—GK Settings Device Name Specifies the name of the device for programming reference.
Page 295: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Ipgw-Shelf Property-Hunt Pattern
9.11.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property—Hunt Pattern 9.11.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property—Hunt Pattern The related settings of hunt patterns can be programmed. The hunt pattern determines how to route incoming calls through virtual IP trunks to the PBX. A maximum of 32 hunt patterns can be programmed. Hunt Pattern 1–16 Leading Number Specifies the leading digits of dialled numbers by which to determine the call distribution port group to direct...
Page 296: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Ipgw-Port Property
9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Port Property 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Port Property Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP Gateway port. The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Trunk Adaptor To connect to a Trunk Adaptor, follow the steps below.
Page 297: Call Distribution Port Group
9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Port Property Call Distribution Port Group Specifies a call distribution port group to which incoming trunk calls are directed through the virtual VoIP gateway port. Value Range 1–48 Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Port Property Feature Guide References 4.2.2.3 Call Distribution Port Group PC Programming Manual...
Page 298: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Ipext-Card Property
The properties of the V-IPEXT card can be specified. Signalling (PTAP) UDP Port No. (Server) Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPEXT card to transmit and receive PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
Page 299 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) First Resending Time (PTAP) Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) data. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Page 300 9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT—Card Property Maintenance Console Location 9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT—Card Property Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) First Resending Time (MGCP) Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend MGCP (Media Gateway Control Protocol) data.
Page 301 9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT—Card Property Maintenance Console Location 9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT—Card Property Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) DSP Digital Gain (Down) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path. Note For KX-NT500 series phones, in place of this setting, the setting for DSP Digital Gain (Down) in 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Card Property—Main is applied.
Page 302 9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT—Card Property Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT—Card Property Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality. Note For KX-NT500 series phones, in place of this setting, the setting for NLP Setting in 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Card Property—Main is applied.
Page 303: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Ipext-Port Property
9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT—Port Property 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT—Port Property Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP extension port. IP-PT Registration and De-registration An IP-PT must be registered to the PBX by programming the PBX and IP-PT before it can be used. Programming instructions for the PBX are given below.
Page 304 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT—Port Property Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for forced de-registration. Click Next. A dialogue box will appear. Click OK. A dialogue box will appear. Click Confirm. If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Forced De-registration Succeed". Click Close.
Page 305 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT—Port Property Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Status Indicates whether a certain IP-PT is registered (reference only).
Page 306 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Program Ver. Indicates the programme software file version of the IP-PT (reference only). Value Range Version number Maintenance Console Location 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Page 307 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT—Port Property PC Programming Manual References 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—Main— P2P Group Feature Guide References 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection Option The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 308 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT—Port Property Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Headset OFF/ON Turns on or off the use of a headset with the IP-PT. Value Range Headset OFF, Headset ON Maintenance Console Location...
Page 309 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) IP Codec Priority Specifies the codec used for compression and decompression of transmitted data. Some codecs may become unavailable depending on the value set here, as follows: –...
Page 310 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Announce Mode Specifies if the extension’s built-in ANNOUNCE feature is enabled. A KX-NT265, KX-NT300 series, or KX-NT500 series phone in a remote location with ANNOUNCE enabled can provide the PBX’s IP Address information to other terminals in the remote location in place of manually programming the PBX’s IP address at each terminal.
Page 311 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port.
Page 312 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Remote Place The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port.
Page 313 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Phone Location Specifies the type of extension connected to the port. Value Range Local: The extension is located on the same network as the PBX (standard configuration). Remote (MRG): The extension is accessing the PBX remotely (use Media Relay Gateway).
Page 314: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Sipext-Card Property
9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT—Card Property 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT—Card Property The properties of the virtual SIP Extension card can be specified. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value. Echo Canceller Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time. Value Range OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms Maintenance Console Location...
Page 315 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT—Card Property EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT—Card Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality. Value Range Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong Maintenance Console Location...
Page 316: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Sipext-Port Property
9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT—Port Property 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT—Port Property Various settings can be programmed for each virtual SIP extension port. The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Main Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port.
Page 317 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT—Port Property Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension Current IP Address Indicates the current IP address of the SIP Extension (reference only). Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 318 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT—Port Property PC Programming Manual References 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—Main— P2P Group 11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group Feature Guide References 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection MWI Method Selects the method of receiving Message Waiting Indications for SIP extensions. Value Range Standard, Unsolicited Note...
Page 319 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT—Port Property Password Specifies the password used for registering a SIP Extension to the PBX. While it is possible to enter a password manually for each SIP Extension, you can copy the value for Extension Number to Password by clicking the Copy to button.
Page 320 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT—Port Property Packet Sampling Time (G.711/G.722) Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound. Value Range 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT—Port Property Feature Guide References...
Page 321 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT—Port Property Password Specifies the password used for registering a SIP Extension to the PBX. While it is possible to enter a password manually for each SIP Extension, you can copy the value for Extension Number to Password by clicking the Copy to button.
Page 322 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT—Port Property FAX/T.38 The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port. Value Range Max.
Page 323 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension FAX Detection Ability Enables the use of the FAX Detection Ability feature. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension FAX Sending Method Specifies the method of transporting the fax signal.
Page 324 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT—Port Property Value Range 272–512 Maintenance Console Location 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension T38 FAX UDPTL Error Correction – Redundancy Specifies whether to enable the redundancy feature when using the T.38 protocol. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 325 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension T38 FAX Rate Management Method Specifies the rate management method when using the T.38 protocol. Value Range Transferred TCF, Local TCF Maintenance Console Location 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension PC Programming Manual...
Page 326: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Ipcs-Card Property
The properties of the V-IPCS card can be specified. Signalling (PTAP) UDP Port No. (Server) Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPCS card to transmit and receive PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
Page 327 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS—Card Property First Resending Time (PTAP) Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) data. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Page 328 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS—Card Property First Resending Time (MGCP) Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend MGCP (Media Gateway Control Protocol) data. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value. Value Range 500 ´...
Page 329 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS—Card Property Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS—Card Property EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS—Card Property NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality. Value Range Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong Maintenance Console Location...
Page 330: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Ipcs-Port Property
9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS—Port Property 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS—Port Property Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP-CS port. IP-CS Registration and De-registration An IP-CS must be registered to the PBX by programming the PBX and IP-CS before it can be used. Programming instructions for the PBX are given below.
Page 331 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS—Port Property Click Confirm. If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Forced De-registration Succeed". Click Close. Once the IP-CS is successfully de-registered, the status of the IP-CS will update to show "None". Main The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 332 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS—Port Property Value Range 00:00:00:00:00:00–FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF Maintenance Console Location 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS—Port Property Current IP Address Indicates the current IP address of the IP-CS (reference only). Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS—Port Property Program Ver.
Page 333 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS—Port Property CS Name Specifies the CS name of the port. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS—Port Property Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port.
Page 334 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS—Port Property The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound. Value Range 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS—Port Property Voice Activity Detection for G.711 Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for the G.711 codec.
Page 335: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Utext-Card Property
9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Card Property 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Card Property Various settings can be programmed for V-UTEXT32 cards. Click Common Settings to change these settings. Main Echo Cancellation Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time. Value Range OFF, 24 ms, 128 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Card Property DSP Digital Gain (Down)
Page 336 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Card Property NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality. Value Range Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong Maintenance Console Location 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Card Property PERIODIC Inform Specifies whether alive monitoring is performed for connected extensions. Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 337 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Card Property Maintenance Console Location 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Card Property Failover Timer (For S-PS/SIP-CS) Specifies the time period after which a SIP-CS that cannot connect to its primary PBX will re-route to its assigned secondary PBX. Note For SIP-CSs, primary PBX and secondary PBX settings must be made through the Web programming interface of the Master SIP-CS or through configuration file programming.
Page 338: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Utext-Port Property
9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Port Property 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Port Property Various settings can be programmed for the ports of V-UTEXT32 cards. KX-UT Series SIP Phone, S-PS, and SIP-CS Registration and De-registration A KX-UT series SIP phone, S-PS, or SIP-CS must be registered to the PBX by programming the PBX and SIP phone, S-PS, or SIP-CS before it can be used.
Page 339 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Port Property Click Forced De-registration. A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers and names are displayed on the left. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for forced de-registration. Click Next. A dialogue box will appear.
Page 340 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension Telephone Type Specifies the connected device type. Note • This setting cannot be changed if a device has already been registered for the port. De-register the device set for the port before changing the setting.
Page 341 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Port Property Value Range 4–16 characters (consisting of 0–9, a–z, A–Z) Maintenance Console Location 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension Status Indicates whether a certain SIP phone, S-PS, or SIP-CS is registered (reference only). Value Range None, Registered Maintenance Console Location...
Page 342 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension Program Ver. Indicates the programme software file version of the SIP phone (reference only). Note Software file version numbers are not displayed for S-PSs or SIP-CSs. Value Range Version number Maintenance Console Location...
Page 343 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Port Property PC Programming Manual References 11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group Feature Guide References 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection Option The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 344 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Port Property System Speed Dial Download Specifies if the connected SIP phone will download system speed dial entries from the PBX. Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Port Property PC Programming Manual References 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main—...
Page 345 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Port Property Packet Sampling Time Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound. Value Range 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Port Property Jitter Buffer - Maximum Delay...
Page 346 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Port Property Remote Place The settings on this screen are for programming the Simple Remote Connection feature for connecting SIP phones in remote locations to the PBX. For details and conditions regarding the use of this feature, refer to "5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection"...
Page 347 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Port Property Phone Location Specifies the type of extension connected to the port. Value Range Local: The extension is located on the same network as the PBX (standard configuration). Remote (SBC): The extension is accessing the PBX remotely (Simple Remote Connection). Remote (MRG): The extension is accessing the PBX remotely (use Media Relay Gateway).
Page 348 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection PC Programming Manual...
Page 349: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Extension-Card Property
9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Extension—Card Property 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Extension—Card Property The property for the extension cards can be specified. SLT Pulse Dial Mode Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area. Value Range Normal, Sweden, New Zealand Maintenance Console Location 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Extension—Card Property SLT Off Hook Time...
Page 350 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Extension—Card Property SLT Pulse Minimum Make Width Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dial. Value Range 8 ´ n (n=1–5) ms Maintenance Console Location 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Extension—Card Property SLT Flash Detection Enables the PBX to detect the flash signal sent when an SLT user presses the hookswitch or the Flash/Recall button.
Page 351: Slt Power Supply
9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Extension—Card Property Feature Guide References 2.11.10 Parallelled Telephone Ringing Start Mode of Extension Caller ID Specifies the Ringing Start Mode of Extension Caller ID. Please consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information. Value Range Mode 1: With Pre-ring signal...
Page 352 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Extension—Card Property Maintenance Console Location 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Extension—Card Property PC Programming Manual...
Page 353: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Extension-Port Property
9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Extension—Port Property 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Extension—Port Property Various settings can be programmed for each extension port. To view the total number of each type of extension connected, click Port Type View. The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 354: Xdp Mode
9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Extension—Port Property Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Extension—Port Property Extension Name Specifies the extension name of the port. Value Range Max.
Page 355 DSS: For connecting a DSS Console (A maximum of 8 DSS Consoles can be connected to the PBX.) VM (DPT): For connecting a Panasonic VPS through DPT Integration PC Console: For connecting a PC Console (A maximum of 8 PC Consoles can be connected to the PBX.) Maintenance Console Location 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Extension—Port Property...
Page 356 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Extension—Port Property Feature Guide References 2.26.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) DPT Type—VM Unit No. Selects the unit number of the connected VPS. This setting is only available when DPT Type—Type on this screen is set to VM (DPT). Value Range Maintenance Console Location 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Extension—Port Property...
Page 357 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Extension—Port Property Headset OFF/ON Turns on or off the use of a headset with a DPT. This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen is set to DPT, DPT (S-DPT), S-Hybrid, or S-Hybrid (S-DPT). Value Range Headset OFF, Headset ON Maintenance Console Location...
Page 358: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Card Property - Lco Type
9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type The properties of the analogue trunk cards can be specified. Outgoing Guard Time Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line. Value Range 3–6 s Maintenance Console Location...
Page 359 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Maintenance Console Location 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Bell Detection—Bell Off Detection Timer Specifies the duration of the bell off detection timer. If the PBX receives no bell signal from the telephone company for the length of time specified here, the PBX treats the call as lost.
Page 360 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type PC Programming Manual References 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Low Speed Pulse Dial—Break Width Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a low speed pulse dial. Low Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here.
Page 361 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type High Speed Pulse Dial—Break Width Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a high speed pulse dial. High Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here. Value Range 12+ (4 ´...
Page 362 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Maintenance Console Location 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type PC Programming Manual References 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Caller ID Detection Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID Signalling Selects the type of Caller ID signalling provided by the telephone company.
Page 363 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Maintenance Console Location 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) END Detection Selects the method used to detect the end of Caller ID information. Value Range Length + Timer, Timer Maintenance Console Location...
Page 364 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Detection Timer Specifies the total time required by the PBX to detect Caller ID information. To enable this setting, Caller ID—Caller ID Signalling on this screen should be set to FSK. Value Range 1040 + (80 ´...
Page 365 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Caller ID—Caller ID (DTMF) End Code Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series. Value Range None, *, #, A, B, C, D Maintenance Console Location 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID...
Page 366: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Port Property - Lco Port
9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Installation Manual References 4.3.4 LCOT6 in KX-NS500 (installed by default) Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port.
Page 367 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Feature Guide References 2.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out Dialling Mode Selects the type of signal used to dial out to the analogue trunk. Value Range DTMF, Pulse Maintenance Console Location 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Feature Guide References 2.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection CPC Signal Detection Time—Outgoing, Incoming...
Page 368 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Value Range Low, High Maintenance Console Location 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Reverse Detection Selects the type of trunk call for which the reverse signal from the telephone company is detected. Value Range Disable: For no trunk call Outgoing: For outgoing trunk calls only...
Page 369 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Maintenance Console Location 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Feature Guide References 2.5.4.7 Pause Insertion 2.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX) 2.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code Flash Time Specifies the length of a flash signal.
Page 370: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Card Property - Pri Type
9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type The properties of the PRI card can be specified. ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T200 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the L2 command to ISDN. Value Range 0–600 ´...
Page 371 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type Maintenance Console Location 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T302 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call. Applies to overlap receiving. Value Range 0–600 ´...
Page 372 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T308 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after receiving the Release message from ISDN. Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T309...
Page 373 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type Maintenance Console Location 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T318 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Resume message. Value Range 0–600 ´...
Page 374 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type ISDN Extension—T200 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the L2 command to ISDN. Value Range 0–600 ´...
Page 375 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type ISDN Extension—T302 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call. Applies to overlap receiving. Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type ISDN Extension—T303 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message to ISDN.
Page 376 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type ISDN Extension—T307 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX maintains a suspended call, before restarting. Value Range 0–6000 ´...
Page 377 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type ISDN Extension—T312 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message to ISDN. Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type ISDN Extension—T316 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Restart message.
Page 378 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type Maintenance Console Location 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type ISDN Extension—T3D9 Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect L2 in "Call by Call" mode. Value Range 0–3000 ´...
Page 379: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Port Property - Pri Port
9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Various settings can be programmed for each PRI port. Main The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 380 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Status Message Specifies whether the Status Message is sent to the network. Value Range No Transmission: Status Message is not sent. When error detection (Mandatory): Send the Status Message when an error (Mandatory) is detected. When error detection (Option / Mandatory): Send the Status Message when an error (Option or Mandatory) is detected.
Page 381 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port • ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In this case, an MSN can be assigned. Value Range CO: For connecting to public network Extension: For connecting to extension QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port) QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)
Page 382 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Maintenance Console Location 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port ISDN Outgoing Call Type Selects the method used to send dialled digits to the network. Value Range En-bloc: The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after the extension user completes dialling. The PBX recognises the end of dialling when (1) # is dialled, if programmed, (2) a pre-programmed telephone number is dialled, or (3) the inter-digit timer expires.
Page 383 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Maintenance Console Location 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port PC Programming Manual References Section 17 PBX Configuration—[9] Private Network Feature Guide References 4.2.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) Extension Setting Extension Setting parameters are applicable only for the PRI extension port.
Page 384: Network Configuration
9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Ring Mode (ISDN MSN Last No. 0 or 00) Selects the ring mode when receiving an incoming call with an MSN ending with "0" or "00". Value Range Ring All Extension for MSN: Ring all ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN. Ring AN Extension for MSN: Ring only one of the ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN.
Page 385 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Maintenance Console Location 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Network Type Selects the network type of the port. Value Range 0–56 (2 UK (Domestic), 5 Netherlands, 6 SwissNET2, 7 SwissNET3, 8 Euro ISDN (Standard), 14 France (Domestic), 19 Finland, 20 Norway, 27 Australia, 51 US National ISDN 2) Maintenance Console Location 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port...
Page 386 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Trunk Property Selects the trunk property of the port.
Page 387 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Called Party Number—Numbering Plan ID—Public, Private Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to incoming trunk calls routed through public and private networks. Value Range Unknown, ISDN-Telephony, National Standard, Private Maintenance Console Location 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Called Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private Selects the type of number that applies to incoming trunk calls routed through public and private networks.
Page 388 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911, 3PTY Specifies whether each ISDN or QSIG supplementary service is used.
Page 389 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Feature Guide References 4.1.2.9 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) CCBS Delete Digits Specifies the number of digits to delete from the received number when receiving a call of the specified type initiated by the CCBS feature from the network.
Page 390: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Card Property-E1 Type
9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type The properties of the E1 card can be specified. To adjust related settings, click Line Signal Setting, MFC-R2 Setting 1, and MFC-R2 Setting 2. Line Coding Selects the line coding type of E1 PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) for the E1 card. Value Range HDB3, AMI Maintenance Console Location...
Page 391 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type Answer Detection Timer Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to recognise the answer signal. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly. Value Range 32 x n (n=1–255) ms Maintenance Console Location 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type...
Page 392 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type Maintenance Console Location 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type DTMF Tone—DTMF Inter-digit Pause Specifies the length of the DTMF inter-digit pause. Value Range 64 + 16 x n (n=0–11) ms Maintenance Console Location 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type PC Programming Manual...
Page 393: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Card Property-E1 Type Line Signal Setting
9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type Line Signal Setting 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type Line Signal Setting DR2 Setting Type Selects the control type of the DR2 (Digital System R2) signal. Value Range Normal, Option 1, Option 3 Maintenance Console Location 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type Line Signal Setting Inter-digit Timer Specifies the pseudo-answer time.
Page 394 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type Line Signal Setting Forced Release Enables the PBX to send a forced release signal. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type Line Signal Setting Forced Release Pattern Selects the bit pattern for a forced release signal. Value Range A=0/B=0, A=0/B=1, A=1/B=0, A=1/B=1 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 395 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type Line Signal Setting Feature Guide References 2.29.1 E1 Line Service Meter Pulse Detection—Length Specifies the length that a call charge meter pulse must be for the PBX to recognise it as a call charge meter pulse.
Page 396 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type Line Signal Setting DSP Gain Adjustment—MFC-R2 Receive Specifies the strength range within which an MFC-R2 signal must be for the DSP to recognise it as an MFC-R2 signal. Value Range -38 - 0 dB – -23 - 0 dB Maintenance Console Location 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type Line Signal Setting Frame Error Detection—Error Detection...
Page 397: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Card Property-E1 Type Mfc-R2 Setting 1
9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 1 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 1 ANI Service—Mode Selects the ANI (Automatic Number Identification) service mode. Value Range None: ANI service is not activated. Incoming call only: Receives the caller’s number from the E1 line. Outgoing call only: Sends the caller’s number to the E1 line.
Page 398 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 1 Maintenance Console Location 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 1 MFC-R2 Timer—Disappearance Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for an MFC-R2 disappearance signal sent from the telephone company.
Page 399 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 1 Group-l Code Assignment—End of Digit Specifies the code used to recognise the end of each digit in an ANI number. Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 1 Group-l Code Assignment—End of Digit Timer Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for further signal before detecting the end of digit of an ANI number.
Page 400 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 1 Maintenance Console Location 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 1 MFC-R2 Group-1[*][#]—E1 MFC-R2 Group1[*] code Specifies the code value of the Group-1 code when the received Group-1 code is [*]. Value Range 11–15 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 401: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Card Property-E1 Type Mfc-R2 Setting 2
9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 2 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 2 Group-A Code Assignment—Address Complete Specifies the address complete (completion of dial reception) code sent to the telephone company. Value Range 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 2 Group-A Code Assignment—ANI Request Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send an ANI number.
Page 402 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 2 Group-A Code Assignment—Set up Speech Path Specifies the setup speech path code sent to the telephone company. Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 2 Group-A Code Assignment—(First) Request Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the first digit of an ANI number.
Page 403 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 2 Maintenance Console Location 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 2 Group-A Code Assignment—(N-3) Request Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the (N-3)th digit of an ANI number. Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 404 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 2 Group-B Code Assignment—Busy Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the status of the called destination is busy. Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 2 Group-B Code Assignment—Unallocated Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the received number is not defined.
Page 405 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 2 Maintenance Console Location 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 2 Group-B Code Assignment—Collect Call Reject Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the collect call has been rejected. Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 406: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Port Property-E1 Port
9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—E1 Port 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—E1 Port Various settings can be programmed for each E1 channel. To change the status of ports, click Command. Shelf Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—E1 Port Slot...
Page 407 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—E1 Port Maintenance Console Location 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—E1 Port Subscriber Number Specifies the number used as the CLIP number. Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—E1 Port Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) Channel Type...
Page 408 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—E1 Port CO Dial Mode Selects the type of signal used to dial out to a trunk. If MFC-R2 is selected, the PBX (not the telephone company) sends a dial tone to the caller when making a trunk call using an E1 line.
Page 409 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—E1 Port Value Range None, 80 x n (n=2–75) ms Maintenance Console Location 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—E1 Port Feature Guide References 2.11.9 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection DTMF Width Selects the length of the DTMF tone sent to the E1 channel. Value Range 80 ms, 160 ms Maintenance Console Location...
Page 410 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—E1 Port Maintenance Console Location 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—E1 Port Pause Time Specifies the length of a pause. Value Range 1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s Maintenance Console Location 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—E1 Port Feature Guide References 2.5.4.7 Pause Insertion 2.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
Page 411: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Expansion Unit1/Expansion Unit2/Expansion Unit3
Configuration—Slot—Expansion Unit1/Expansion Unit2/Expansion Unit3 Settings for Expansion Units connected to the KX-NS500 over a stacking connection can be programmed. Click Expansion Unit1, Expansion Unit2 or Expansion Unit3 on the Slot screen to view the physical card shelf of the Expansion Unit.
Page 412 9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Expansion Unit1/Expansion Unit2/Expansion Unit3 • 3: Expansion Unit2 • 4: Expansion Unit3 Slot: The physical slot number within the Expansion Unit where the card is installed. Programming Port Properties for cards installed in Expansion Units To change the status of a port when programming via Web Maintenance Console, click the desired cell in the Connection column, and then select INS or OUS for the port.
Page 413: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Doorphone Card-Card Property
9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property 9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property The doorphone card’s settings can be programmed. The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Port Status Specifies the port’s status.
Page 414 9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property Value Range 10 ´ n (n=1–255) s Maintenance Console Location 9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property PC Programming Manual...
Page 415: Pbx Configuration-[1-2] Configuration-Portable Station
9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station Various portable station (PS) settings can be programmed. PS Registration and De-registration A PS must be registered to the PBX by programming both the PBX and PS before it can be used. Programming instructions of the PBX are given below;...
Page 416 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station Personal Identification Number Specifies the Personal Identification Number (PIN) of the PBX, used to avoid registering a PS to the wrong PBX. Note that the same PIN should be entered at the PS, before the PS is registered to the PBX. Value Range 4 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location...
Page 417 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station PC Programming Manual References 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Name Feature Guide References 5.2.4.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection Status Indicates whether a certain PS is registered (reference only).
Page 418: Pbx Configuration-[1-3] Configuration-Option
9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option System options can be programmed. System Wireless—System ID Indicates the radio system ID used to register a PS (reference only). To clear the System ID Click the Clear Master CS button. A warning will be displayed. Confirm the contents of the warning, and then click Yes. Note The System ID can be cleared using this procedure only in Off-line mode.
Page 419 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option PC Programming Manual...
Page 420: Pbx Configuration-[1-4] Configuration-Clock Priority
Value Range None, Shelf and Slot number Shelf and slot numbers are listed using the pattern "X-Y": • X: Shelf number 14 – 1: KX-NS300/KX-NS500 basic unit – 2: Expansion Unit1 – 3: Expansion Unit2 – 4: Expansion Unit3 •...
Page 421: Pbx Configuration-[1-5] Configuration-Dsp Resource
9.37.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting 9.37 PBX Configuration—[1-5] Configuration—DSP Resource IP communications that are handled by the PBX require DSP resources. DSP resources can be reserved for various functions of the PBX. The DSP resource advisor is a tool that analyses the configuration and user requirements for the system in order to recommend which DSP card should be used.
Page 422 9.37.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting Feature Guide References 5.5.4 DSP Resource Usage Services—VoIP (G.711) Specifies the number of simultaneous VoIP calls to reserve DSP resources for. Value Range 0–506 VoIP calls Maintenance Console Location 9.37 PBX Configuration—[1-5] Configuration—DSP Resource Feature Guide References 5.5.4 DSP Resource Usage Services—Unified message Specifies the number of UM ports to reserve DSP resources for.
Page 423 9.37.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting Value Range 0–64 ports Maintenance Console Location 9.37 PBX Configuration—[1-5] Configuration—DSP Resource Feature Guide References 5.5.4 DSP Resource Usage Services—Conference trunk Specifies the number of conference rooms to reserve DSP resources for. Value Range 0–24 conference rooms Maintenance Console Location 9.37 PBX Configuration—[1-5] Configuration—DSP Resource Feature Guide References...
Page 424 9.37.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting Value Range • Set: Specify a date and time to apply the changes, and click OK. The changes will be applied at the specified date and time. • Apply now: The changes are applied immediately. Click OK to apply the settings immediately. Maintenance Console Location 9.37 PBX Configuration—[1-5] Configuration—DSP Resource PC Programming Manual...
Page 425: Pbx Configuration-[1-5-1] Configuration-Dsp Resource-Setting-Dsp Resource Advisor
9.37.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting 9.37.1.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting—DSP Resource Advisor The DSP Resource Advisor assists programmers in the allocation of DSP resources to various PBX functions. Note the value of Total Power. This is the total capacity for allocating DSP resources, depending on the DSP card installed in the PBX.
Page 426: Pbx Configuration-[1-5-2] Configuration-Dsp Resource-Usage
9.37.2 PBX Configuration—[1-5-2] Configuration—DSP Resource—Usage 9.37.2 PBX Configuration—[1-5-2] Configuration—DSP Resource—Usage The Usage screen is a graphical display of DSP resource usage. This information is useful to analyse usage patterns over time to determine DSP resource needs and optimal configuration settings. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 427: Pbx Configuration-[2] System
Section 10 PBX Configuration—[2] System This section serves as reference operating instructions for the System menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 428: Pbx Configuration-[2-1] System-Date & Time
10.1.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-1] System—Date & Time—Date & Time Setting 10.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1] System—Date & Time 10.1.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-1] System—Date & Time—Date & Time Setting The date and time of the PBX can be programmed. The date and time will be shown on the display of extensions (e.g., PT, PS).
Page 429: Pbx Configuration-[2-1-2] System-Date & Time-Sntp / Daylight Saving
10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving Automatic clock adjustment and Summer time (daylight saving time) settings of the PBX can be programmed. Automatic clock adjustment can be performed using one of two methods, ISDN & Caller ID or SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol).
Page 430 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving Maintenance Console Location 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving Feature Guide References 5.5.5 Automatic Setup SNTP—Time Zone—Time Zone Specifies your local UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) time zone using the up and down arrows. Note If KX-UT series SIP phones are connected to the PBX, and this setting is changed, they must be restarted for the new time zone setting to take effect.
Page 431: Pbx Configuration-[2-1-2] System-Date & Time-Sntp / Daylight Saving-Daylight Saving
10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving 10.1.2.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving Summer time can be programmed. Summer time sets the clock one hour forward at 2:00 AM on the start date, and one hour back at 2:00 AM on the end date. The start and end dates of a maximum of 20 different summer times can be programmed.
Page 432 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving End Date—Year, Month, Day Specifies the end date of daylight savings time. Value Range Year: 2000–2099 Month: 1–12 Day: 1–31 Maintenance Console Location 10.1.2.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving PC Programming Manual References 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date &...
Page 433: Pbx Configuration-[2-2] System-Operator & Bgm
10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & Settings related to the PBX operator and audio sources can be specified. PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the extension number or floating extension number of incoming call distribution group to be designated as the PBX operator in each time mode (day/lunch/break/night).
Page 434 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM BGM and Music on Hold—Sound on Transfer Selects the audio source for Music for Transfer (either the same music source chosen for the Music on Hold, or ringback tone). Value Range Same as Music on Hold, Ringback Tone Maintenance Console Location 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator &...
Page 435: Pbx Configuration-[2-3] System-Timers & Counters
10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Various system timers and counters can be programmed. Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone Automatic Redial—Repeat Counter Specifies the number of times Automatic Redial is attempted before being cancelled. Value Range 0–10 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 436 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Feature Guide References 2.6.3 Last Number Redial Automatic Redial—Analogue CO Mute / Busy Detection Timer (s) Specifies the length of time before the PBX stops muting the caller’s voice and cancels busy tone detection when Automatic Redial to analogue trunk is performed.
Page 437 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Dial—Extension Inter-digit (s) Specifies the length of time within which subsequent digits must be dialled before the PBX sends a reorder tone. Value Range 1–250 s Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Feature Guide References 2.5.2 Automatic Extension Release Dial—Analogue CO First Digit (s)
Page 438 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)—Day (s), Lunch (s), Break (s), Night (s) Specifies the length of time until an unanswered trunk call is redirected to the intercept routing destination in each time mode.
Page 439 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.12.1 Call Transfer Recall—Call Park Recall (s) Specifies the length of time that a parked call waits to be retrieved, before the Transfer Recall destination assigned to the extension that parked the call hears a Call Park Recall ring.
Page 440 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Tone Length—Busy Tone / DND Tone (s) Specifies the length of time that a busy/DND tone is heard when a call is made to an extension in busy status or DND mode. A reorder tone will be sent when this timer expires. (For a call through DISA, the call will be disconnected when this timer expires.) Value Range 1–15 s...
Page 441 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf DISA—Delayed Answer Timer (s) Specifies the length of time that the caller hears a ringback tone before hearing an OGM. Value Range 0–30 s Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers &...
Page 442 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters PC Programming Manual References 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant— Operator (Extension Number) Feature Guide References 2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) DISA—2nd Dial Timer for AA (s) Specifies the length of time in which the caller must dial the second digit before the DISA AA Service activates.
Page 443 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters DISA—Disconnect Timer after Intercept (s) Specifies the length of time that an intercepted DISA call rings at the intercept routing destination before being disconnected. Value Range 0–60 s Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters PC Programming Manual References 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Guide References...
Page 444 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters PC Programming Manual References 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Guide References 2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) DISA—Progress Tone Continuation Time before Recording Message (s) Specifies the length of time that a progress tone is sent to the manager extension before recording an OGM. Value Range 0–60 s Maintenance Console Location...
Page 445 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Value Range 10 ´ n (n=1–15) s Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters PC Programming Manual References 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone Feature Guide References 2.18.1 Doorphone Call Doorphone—Call Duration (x10s) Specifies the length of time until an answered doorphone call is disconnected.
Page 446 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Feature Guide References 2.18.2 Door Open Timed Reminder—Repeat Counter Specifies the number of times that an alarm is repeated. Value Range 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Feature Guide References 2.24.4 Timed Reminder Timed Reminder—Interval Time (x10s) Specifies the length of time between the repeated alarms.
Page 447 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Value Range 60 ´ n (n = 0–60) s Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Feature Guide References 2.14.2 Conference Unattended Conference—Warning Tone Start Timer (s) Specifies the length of time until the parties involved in an Unattended Conference receive a warning tone after the conference originator receives the Unattended Conference Recall tone but does not return to the conference.
Page 448 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Value Range 0–15 s Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters PC Programming Manual References 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Visual Caller ID Display (s) Specifies the length of time that a Caller ID number, with the Call Waiting tone offered by an analogue line from the telephone company, is shown on the display.
Page 449 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters 2.7.6 Verification Code Entry 2.24.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) External Sensor—Ring Duration (s) Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for the called party to answer before cancelling a sensor call. Value Range 10 ´...
Page 450 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters PC Programming Manual References 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table Feature Guide References 4.2.1 TIE Line Service PT Display—PT Last Display Duration in Idle Mode (s) Specifies the length of time that the current information remains on the display after the extension returns to idle status.
Page 451 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters During Conversation—DTMF Signal Length (ms) Specifies the length of time that a DTMF signal is sent when a number is dialled from a PT or PS during a conversation. Value Range 80 ms, 160 ms, 240 ms, 320 ms Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers &...
Page 452 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters PC Programming Manual References 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options— System Wireless—Out of Range Registration Feature Guide References 4.2.6.1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group SVM—Recording Time (s) Specifies the maximum length of a message recorded by the SVM feature. Value Range 1–600 s Maintenance Console Location...
Page 453 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Conference Group Call—Ring Duration (s) Specifies the length of time that a conference group call will ring. The conference group call will be established with members who answer within this time. If no members answer the call before this timer expires, the call is cancelled.
Page 454: Pbx Configuration-[2-4] System-Week Table
10.4.1 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table—Time Setting 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation depending on the time of day. The time mode can be switched either automatically or manually. Select the desired switching mode from the Time Service Switching Mode option.
Page 455 10.4.1 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table—Time Setting Feature Guide References 5.1.3 Tenant Service 5.1.4 Time Service 2. Break—Break 1–3 Start—Setting Enables the setting of the start time for each break period. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.4.1 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table—Time Setting Feature Guide References 5.1.3 Tenant Service 5.1.4 Time Service...
Page 456 10.4.1 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table—Time Setting 5.1.4 Time Service PC Programming Manual...
Page 457: Pbx Configuration-[2-5] System-Holiday Table
10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation during holidays. Select the desired time mode from the Holiday Mode list. The start and end dates of a maximum of 24 different holidays can be programmed. You can click the UM Holiday Table tab to open the Holiday Table used for features of the Unified Messaging system.
Page 458 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table Value Range 1–31 Maintenance Console Location 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table PC Programming Manual References 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table— Start Date (Month Day) Feature Guide References 5.1.4 Time Service Holiday Table—End Date—Month Specifies the month of the holiday end date. Value Range 1–12 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 459 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table Feature Guide References 5.1.4 Time Service PC Programming Manual...
Page 460: Pbx Configuration-[2-6] System-Numbering Plan
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main 10.6 PBX Configuration—[2-6] System—Numbering Plan 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Details of the extension numbering schemes, feature access numbers, and numbers to access other PBXs in a network can be programmed here. For more information on flexible numbering, see "5.5.7 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the Feature Guide.
Page 461 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main 20.1 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings— Mailbox Number No. of Additional Digits Specifies the number of additional digits following the leading number. Value Range None: 0 digit X: 1 digit XX: 2 digits Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Features...
Page 462: Trunk Group Access
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 11.1.2 PBX Configuration—[3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority Feature Guide References 2.5.5.3 Trunk Access Trunk Group Access Specifies the feature number used to make a trunk call using an idle trunk from a certain trunk group. Value Range Max.
Page 463: Doorphone Call
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 2.6.3 Last Number Redial System Speed Dialling / Personal Speed Dialling Specifies the feature number used to make a call using a System/Personal Speed Dialling number. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References...
Page 464: Group Paging
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone Feature Guide References 2.18.1 Doorphone Call Group Paging Specifies the feature number used to page a certain paging group. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References...
Page 465: Single Co Line Access
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager— Manager Feature Guide References 2.30.2 Outgoing Message (OGM)
Page 466: Directed Call Pickup
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Group Call Pickup Specifies the feature number used to answer a call ringing at a certain call pickup group. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group Feature Guide References...
Page 467: Group Paging Answer
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—External Pager Feature Guide References 2.17.2 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS) Group Paging Answer Specifies the feature number used to answer a page to a paging group. Value Range Max.
Page 468: Account Code Entry
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions— Remote Operation by Other Extension Feature Guide References 2.7.5 Walking COS 2.7.6 Verification Code Entry Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Wireless XDP Parallel mode.
Page 469 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 2.13.1 Call Hold Call Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Holding Extension Number Specifies the feature number used to retrieve a held call from a different extension by specifying a holding extension number.
Page 470: Door Open
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 2.13.1 Call Hold Door Open Specifies the feature number used to open a door. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References...
Page 471 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 2.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA) SIP Refer (Blind) Specifies the feature number used to perform a blind transfer from a SIP extension. Value Range Max.
Page 472 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911, 3PTY Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) 4.2.4.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG CLIR Set / Cancel...
Page 473 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) MCID Specifies the feature number used to ask the telephone company to trace a malicious call. This feature can be used during a call or while hearing a reorder tone after the caller hangs up. Value Range Max.
Page 474 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD/DND for incoming trunk and intercom calls. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References...
Page 475 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 2.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features FWD No Answer Timer Set Specifies the feature number used to set the length of time before a call is forwarded. Value Range Max.
Page 476 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD for incoming trunk calls to an incoming call distribution group. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References...
Page 477: Walking Extension
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 2.4.3 Call Pickup Paging Deny Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Paging Deny (i.e., preventing other extensions from paging your extension). Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References...
Page 478: Manual Call Waiting For Extension Call
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 2.11.5 Data Line Security Manual Call Waiting for Extension Call Specifies the feature number used to set or change the method of receiving a Call Waiting notification from an extension. Value Range Max.
Page 479: Incoming Call Queue Monitor
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Executive— Executive Busy Override Deny Feature Guide References 2.10.2 Executive Busy Override Not Ready (Manual Wrap-up) Mode On / Off Specifies the feature number used to enter or leave Not Ready mode. Value Range Max.
Page 480 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous— Supervisor Extension Number Feature Guide References 2.2.2.8 Supervisory Feature Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Program Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set/cancel the Hot Line feature, or programme the number to be automatically dialled.
Page 481 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main BGM Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel the BGM heard through the telephone speaker while on-hook. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator &...
Page 482 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Printing Message Specifies the feature number used to select a Printing Message to be output on SMDR. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel &...
Page 483: Extension Feature Clear
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 5.1.4 Time Service Remote Extension Dial Lock Off Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to unlock other extensions using the Extension Dial Lock feature. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References...
Page 484 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 2.24.2 Extension Feature Clear Extension PIN Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set a PIN for an extension. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References...
Page 485: Busy Out Cancel
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Conference Group Call—Ring Duration (s) 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Miscellaneous— Conference Group Call Operation 11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group Feature Guide References 2.15.1 Conference Group Call Centralised BLF Monitor Cancel Specifies the feature number used to cancel monitoring of an extension using an NDSS button.
Page 486: Simplified Voice Message Access
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Simplified Voice Message Access Specifies the feature number used to access the SVM feature to record, listen to and delete messages. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 12.1.8 PBX Configuration-[4-1-8] Extension-Wired Extension-Simplified Voice Message...
Page 487 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Note • This tab is for programming extensions connected to Expansion Units. For information about setting up Expansion Units, see 9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Expansion Unit1/ Expansion Unit2/Expansion Unit3. • For further information about programming for KX-T7710 phones, refer to the 2.6.7 KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling in the Feature Guide.
Page 488 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual...
Page 489: Pbx Configuration-[2-6-2] System-Numbering Plan-Quick Dial
10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial Quick Dialling numbers are used to call extensions or outside parties, or access certain features without having to dial their full numbers. It is possible to register Quick Dialling numbers that overlap with other registered numbers (refer to "Automatic Rerouting of VoIP Calls to Public Trunks"...
Page 490: Pbx Configuration-[2-6-3] System-Numbering Plan-B/Na Dnd Call Feature
10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/ NA DND Call Feature Feature numbers used to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features are available while hearing a busy, DND, or ringback tone. Each feature must have a unique feature number. For more information on flexible numbering, see "5.5.7 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering"...
Page 491 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny Feature Guide References 2.10.2 Executive Busy Override Alternate Calling - Ring / Voice Specifies the feature number used to allow a caller to change the called extension’s preset call receiving method to ring tone or voice.
Page 492: Automatic Callback Busy
10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny Feature Guide References 2.10.3 Call Monitor Automatic Callback Busy Specifies the feature number used to reserve a busy line and receive callback ringing when the line becomes idle.
Page 493: Pbx Configuration-[2-7] System-Class Of Service
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings 10.7 PBX Configuration—[2-7] System—Class of Service 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Each extension, doorphone port, incoming call distribution group, and trunk group is assigned a Class of Service (COS). Certain features can be programmed to behave differently depending on the COS. A maximum of 64 COS levels can be programmed.
Page 494 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone— 15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied Code 15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception Code Feature Guide References 2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) TRS Level on Extension Lock Specifies the TRS/Barring level for making trunk calls when an extension is locked using the Extension Dial Lock feature.
Page 495 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous— TRS Override by System Speed Dialling Feature Guide References 2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/System 2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) CO & SMDR COS Name Specifies the name of the COS.
Page 496: Transfer To Co
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Transfer to CO Enables the transferring of calls to trunks. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—...
Page 497 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Feature Guide References 2.5.4.3 Account Code Entry Outgoing CO Call Printout (SMDR) Enables the automatic recording of information about outgoing trunk calls on SMDR. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 498: Dnd Override
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.4.3 Call Pickup DND Override...
Page 499 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 2.10.4 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension 2.10.4.4 Whisper OHCA Transfer to busy Extension w/o BSS Operation Enables a transferred call to be queued when the transfer destination is busy. Value Range Disable: The call is not transferred.
Page 500: Executive Busy Override
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS) Call Monitor Enables listening to a busy extension’s conversation. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—...
Page 501 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Feature Guide References 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS) Manager COS Name...
Page 502 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) PT Programming Mode Level Specifies the level of authorisation for performing PT programming. Value Range Disable: A PT user cannot perform any programming. PROG Only: A PT user can perform only personal programming. PROG **/*#: A PT user can perform Administrator level and User level programming.
Page 503 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings PC Programming Manual References 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Feature Guide References 5.1.4 Time Service PDN/SDN An SDN button allows a PT user to see the current status of the corresponding PDN extension, and to pick up...
Page 504 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Making call by COS of SDN key’s owner Selects whether an extension that uses an SDN button to make calls is given the COS of the SDN button’s registered (owner) extension. This setting is only available when SDN Key Mode above is set to "Standard SDN".
Page 505: Door Unlock
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Door Unlock Enables using the door opener feature. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Feature Guide References 2.18.2 Door Open External Relay Access...
Page 506 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Guide References 2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Remote Operation by Other Extension Allows the Walking COS feature to be used from a remote location (inside the PBX, or outside the PBX using DISA).
Page 507 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings COS Name Specifies the name of the COS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS) CA Chat Enables the chat feature when using Communication Assistant (CA) Client.
Page 508 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 2.26.2 CA (Communication Assistant) Miscellaneous COS Name Specifies the name of the COS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS) Conference Group Call Operation Enables making conference group calls.
Page 509 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings PC Programming Manual...
Page 510: Pbx Configuration-[2-7-2] System-Class Of Service-External Call Block
10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—External Call Block 10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—External Call Block Each COS can have different trunk groups available for making trunk calls, depending on the time mode (day/ lunch/break/night). Select the desired time mode from the list. Outgoing Trunk Group 1–64 Specifies the available trunk groups.
Page 511: Pbx Configuration-[2-7-3] System-Class Of Service-Internal Call Block
10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3] System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block 10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3] System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block Internal Call Block determines the restrictions placed on making intercom calls. The extensions, incoming call distribution groups, and doorphones belonging to a certain COS can be programmed to not receive intercom calls from those belonging to a certain COS.
Page 512: Pbx Configuration-[2-8] System-Ring Tone Patterns
10.8.1 PBX Configuration—[2-8-1] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO 10.8 PBX Configuration—[2-8] System—Ring Tone Patterns 10.8.1 PBX Configuration—[2-8-1] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming trunk calls depending on the trunk group that the calls are received on.
Page 513: Pbx Configuration-[2-8-2] System-Ring Tone Patterns-Call From Doorphone
10.8.2 PBX Configuration—[2-8-2] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from DOORPHONE 10.8.2 PBX Configuration—[2-8-2] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from DOORPHONE Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming doorphone calls depending on the doorphone port that the calls originate from. A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.
Page 514: Pbx Configuration-[2-8-3] System-Ring Tone Patterns-Call From Others
10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming intercom calls and ringing triggered by certain PBX features (Timed Reminder, Call Back, and Live Call Screening). A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.
Page 515 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Maintenance Console Location 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table Live Call Screening—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8...
Page 516: Pbx Configuration-[2-9] System-System Options
10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Various system settings can be programmed. Option 1 PT LCD—Date Display Selects the order that the month and date are shown on the displays of extensions. Value Range Date-Month, Month-Date Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options PT LCD—Time Display...
Page 517 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options PT Fwd / DND—Fwd LED Selects the light pattern of the FWD/DND button while the FWD feature is activated. Value Range On (Solid): Red on Flash: Slow red flashing Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options PC Programming Manual References 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND...
Page 518 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options FWD/DND Cycle Switch: Switch the FWD on/DND on/Off mode instead of entering the programming mode for the FWD/DND setting. (When there are separate FWD/DND settings for calls from trunks and calls from extensions, mode switching cannot be performed.) Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options PC Programming Manual References...
Page 519 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.11.2 Off-hook Monitor PT Operation—Privacy Release by SCO key Selects the function of the S-CO button during a trunk call. Value Range Enable: Pressing the S-CO button activates the Privacy Release feature Disable: Pressing the S-CO button switches the information shown on the PT display.
Page 520 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection PT Operation—Automatic Answer for Call from CO after Specifies the number of times a PT in Hands-free Answerback mode will ring before a conversation is established automatically when it receives a call from a trunk.
Page 521 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options PT Operation—Hold key mode Selects which extensions can retrieve a held call or a call that is transferred by Call Transfer without Announcement feature. Value Range Hold: Any extension can retrieve a held call. Exclusive Hold: Only the holding extension can retrieve a held call. Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References...
Page 522 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Value Range Clear, Do not clear Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.24.2 Extension Feature Clear CODEC—System CODEC Selects the codec type for PSs. Value Range A-Law, Mu-Law Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options CODEC—Network CODEC Selects the codec type for ISDN lines.
Page 523 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options PC Programming Manual References 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting— ISDN Outgoing Call Type Feature Guide References 4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY Redial—Automatic Redial when No Answer (ISDN) Selects whether Automatic Redial to an ISDN line is performed when the called party does not answer within a pre-programmed time period.
Page 524 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options PC Programming Manual References 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters— Automatic Redial—Redial Call Ring Duration (x10s) Feature Guide References 2.6.3 Last Number Redial Redial—Save Dial After Connection to Redial Memory Specifies whether any digits dialled after the called party answers (for example, to access a specific extension within another company) are also saved as part of the redial number.
Page 525 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options PC Programming Manual References 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Extension-CO Line Call Duration Limit 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— Extension-CO Duration Time (*60s) Feature Guide References 2.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation CO - CO Call Limitation—After Conference Selects whether to allow a call between 2 outside destinations to continue after the originator of the conference has left the conference.
Page 526 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options "TIE to CO" and "TIE to TIE" calls through KX-NS500s with a different area ID for Logical Partitioning programmed in 9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main— Area ID for logical partition. Legacy Trunk IP Trunk Private Line (Area ID=a) (Area ID=b)
Page 527 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Note When local partitioning is applied, if there are QSIG connections between KX-NS500s, the connected KX-NS500s are considered to be the same area and restrictions for private lines are removed. Connections from outside lines of other devices to private lines are restricted under all circumstances. QSIG connections using PRI adaptors are also restricted.
Page 528 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options 2.17.1 Paging 2.25.2 Confirmation Tone Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-1 : Start Talking after Making Call / Call from DOORPHONE Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 3-1. Confirmation Tone 3-1 is heard from an extension when, for example, it pages another extension, or from a doorphone when the doorphone button is pressed.
Page 529 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-2 : Finish Conference Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 4-2. Confirmation Tone 4-2 is heard from an extension when a party leaves a conference call. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.14.2 Conference...
Page 530 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Value Range Type A, Type B Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.25.1 Dial Tone Dial Tone—Dial Tone for ARS Selects the dial tone the PBX (instead of the network) sends to the caller when a call is made using the ARS feature, or ISDN En Bloc dialling.
Page 531 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Echo Cancel—Extension to Analogue Line Enables the use of echo cancelling for extension-to-analogue trunk calls. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Echo Cancel—Extension to Digital Line Enables the use of echo cancelling for extension-to-ISDN line calls.
Page 532 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options DSS Key—Call Pick-up by DSS key for Direct Incoming Call Specifies whether a DSS button will light up or flash when a call rings at the specified extension. To enable this setting, DSS Key—DSS key mode for Incoming Call on this screen must be set to "ON or Flash". Value Range Disable: The DSS button will light up when a call arrives, but pressing it will not pick up the call.
Page 533 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options DSS Key—Caller Information Display before Call Pick-up Specifies whether incoming caller information is displayed after pressing the DSS button when a call is ringing at the designated extension, instead of answering the call. Value Range Enable: Pressing the DSS button displays the caller’s information.
Page 534 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 4.2.1 TIE Line Service Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is transferred to CO (CLIP of Held Party) Enables the transfer of related CLIP information when a party on hold is transferred. When set to "Enable", the transfer destination will receive the original caller’s CLIP information, not the information of the extension that performed the transfer.
Page 535 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.2.2.3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) 4.2.6 Network ICD Group System Wireless—Out of Range Registration Selects whether the PBX can set the status of a PS to Out of Range if no signal is received from the PS for a preset length of time.
Page 536 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.4.4 Hands-free Answerback Option 5 SLT—SLT Hold Mode Selects how to hold a line and transfer a call with an SLT. For details of each mode, see "2.13.1 Call Hold" in the Feature Guide.
Page 537 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.10.4.4 Whisper OHCA Call Waiting—Automatic Call Waiting for Extension Call Selects whether Busy Station Signalling (BSS) is automatically performed when an extension user calls a busy extension.
Page 538 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options PT Feature Access—No. 1–8 Specifies the System Feature Access Menu (1–8) shown on the display of an extension. Value Range None, Call Back Cancel, Call Pickup Direct, Call Pickup Group, DOORPHONE Call, Door Open, Relay On, External BGM, Paging Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options...
Page 539 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Built-in Communication Assistant—System status retry counter Specifies the number of times that the alive check is repeated for First Party Call Control CTI such as Communication Assistant (CA). When the alive check has been attempted the programmed number times without success, the PBX assumes that the logical connection with the CTI application software has been lost.
Page 540 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options 3rd Party CTI—CDR retry interval timer Specifies the length of time until the alive check of CDR is retried when no response is received, for Third Party Call Control CTI. Value Range 0–60 s Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.26.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
Page 541 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension Option 7 Incoming Call Log—Busy/Intercept (when Called Party is Busy) Specifies whether the following types of calls are recorded in the incoming call log of the original destination. •...
Page 542 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.19.2 Incoming Call Log Incoming Call Log—Extension / TIE Call Specifies whether extension/TIE calls are recorded in the answering extension’s incoming call log. Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options...
Page 543 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection P2P Group—Video Conference Specifies the availability of video conferencing for capable extensions within P2P groups. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection Extension - Trunk P2P—IP Extension - SIP Trunk P2P Specifies whether P2P connections are enabled between SIP trunks and IP extensions.
Page 544 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Option 9 Extension / Mailbox Setting—Mailbox Number Synchronization with Extension Number Enables the synchronisation of Mailbox Number and Extension Number settings. Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—...
Page 545: Pbx Configuration-[2-10] System-Extension Cid Settings
10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings 10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings Various settings for extension Caller ID can be programmed. Extension Caller ID Modulation Type Specifies the modulation frequency to be used when sending Caller ID information to an SLT. Value Range V.23(ETSI), Bell202(Bellcore) Maintenance Console Location...
Page 546: Caller Id Signal Type
10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings Channel Seizure Wait Time Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to send the seizure signal following the first ring when sending Caller ID information to an SLT. Value Range 64 ´...
Page 547 10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID Send Caller ID Name to Extension Enables the PBX to send the caller’s name when sending Caller ID information to an SLT. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 548 10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings Maintenance Console Location 10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID PC Programming Manual...
Page 549: Pbx Configuration-[2-11] System-Audio Gain
10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH 10.11 PBX Configuration—[2-11] System—Audio Gain 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH Gain levels for the External Pager/External BGM ports can be programmed. Paging—EPG 1-6 (External Pager 1-6) Specifies the paging volume for External Pager port 1. Value Range -15.5–15.5 dB Maintenance Console Location...
Page 550 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH Value Range -31.5–31.5 dB Maintenance Console Location 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH PC Programming Manual References 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM Feature Guide References 2.13.4 Music on Hold 2.30.1 Background Music (BGM) External MOH—MOH 3–8 (Music on Hold 3–8) Specifies the music volume for External BGM port 1-6 (MOH 3-8).
Page 551: Pbx Configuration-[2-11-2] System-Audio Gain-Card
10.11.2 PBX Configuration—[2-11-2] System—Audio Gain—Card 10.11.2 PBX Configuration—[2-11-2] System—Audio Gain—Card Gain levels can be programmed for each type of card. Up Gain (To PBX) Specifies the volume for audio signals from the selected type of card to the PBX. Value Range -31.5–31.5 dB Maintenance Console Location 10.11.2 PBX Configuration—[2-11-2] System—Audio Gain—Card...
Page 552 10.11.2 PBX Configuration—[2-11-2] System—Audio Gain—Card PC Programming Manual...
Page 553: Pbx Configuration-[3] Group
Section 11 PBX Configuration—[3] Group This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Group menu of the PBX Configuration Menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 554: Pbx Configuration-[3-1] Group-Trunk Group
11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings 11.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1] Group—Trunk Group 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings Trunks can be organised into trunk groups. The settings of a trunk group are applied to all trunks in the group. A maximum of 64 trunk groups can be programmed. For more information on trunk groups, see "5.1.2 Group"...
Page 555: Line Hunting Order
11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings Line Hunting Order Specifies the trunk hunting sequence for the trunk group. The hunting sequence can be programmed to start from the lowest or highest numbered trunks, or to rotate uniformly among all trunks. Value Range High ->...
Page 556 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings PC Programming Manual References 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 2.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation Caller ID Modification Table Specifies the table to be used for modifying caller information (telephone number).
Page 557 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings Maintenance Console Location 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings PC Programming Manual References 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings DISA Tone Detection—Silence Enables the disconnection of a DISA-originated trunk-to-trunk call by silence detection. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 558 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings PC Programming Manual References 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Silence Enables the disconnection of an SVM-originated trunk-to-trunk call by silence detection.
Page 559: Host Pbx Access Code
11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings Feature Guide References 2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Cyclic Enables the disconnection of an SVM-originated trunk-to-trunk call by cyclic signal detection. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings PC Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
Page 560 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings PC Programming Manual References 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 2.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX) Collect Call Reject (for Brazil) Group Name Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference.
Page 561 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings Value Range 1000 ms, 1500 ms, 2000 ms, 2500 ms Maintenance Console Location 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings PC Programming Manual...
Page 562: Pbx Configuration-[3-1-2] Group-Trunk Group-Local Access Priority
11.1.2 PBX Configuration—[3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority 11.1.2 PBX Configuration—[3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority Trunk groups can be assigned a priority for Idle Line Access. When making a trunk call by Idle Line Access, the PBX will search trunk groups for an idle trunk according to the priority assigned here. Trunk Group No.
Page 563: Pbx Configuration-[3-1-3] Group-Trunk Group-Caller Id Modification
11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification The telephone numbers of incoming callers can be modified automatically according to pre-programmed modification tables, and then recorded for calling back. Leading Digits After the caller’s number is modified by the Length of Digits Modification Tables or CLIP Modification Tables, the PBX checks the leading digits of the modified number for an area code programmed in the Caller ID Modification Table assigned to that trunk group.
Page 564 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID Added Number Specifies the number to be added to the incoming caller’s number in the place of the removed digits. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification PC Programming Manual References...
Page 565 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification Minimum Caller ID Digits (for National) Specifies the minimum number of digits required in the caller’s number for it to be recognised as a national call. The value specified here must be smaller than Minimum Caller ID Digits (for International).
Page 566 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification CLIP When incoming caller information is sent through an ISDN line and the type of the network numbering plan is International, National, or Subscriber, the caller’s number can be modified as programmed in the Modification Tables assigned to the trunk group.
Page 567 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID PC Programming Manual...
Page 568: Pbx Configuration-[3-1-4] Group-Trunk Group-Dialling Plan
11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan 11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after an extension user completes dialling. The PBX can recognise the end of dialling when the dialled telephone number starts with the programmed leading number and contains the programmed total number of digits.
Page 569 11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan Added Number Specifies the number to be added to the number dialled by en-bloc dialling in the place of the removed digits. Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan Feature Guide References 4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY...
Page 570: Pbx Configuration-[3-1-4] Group-Trunk Group-Dialling Plan-Auto Assign
11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan 11.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan—Auto Assign It is possible to assign a set of leading numbers automatically. Select Auto Assigning Table Selects the set of preset leading number values to assign to the active dialling plan table. When Type D is selected, you will be prompted to enter a 3-digit area code, and 7 "X"s, in cells 1 through 47 of the dialling plan table.
Page 571: Pbx Configuration-[3-1-5] Group-Trunk Group-Charge Rate
11.1.5 PBX Configuration—[3-1-5] Group—Trunk Group—Charge Rate 11.1.5 PBX Configuration—[3-1-5] Group—Trunk Group—Charge Rate The rate charged per pay tone signal (sent from the telephone company) can be assigned for each trunk group. Trunk Group Name Indicates the name of the trunk group (reference only). Value Range Max.
Page 572: Pbx Configuration-[3-2] Group-User Group
11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group 11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group Extensions can be assigned to a tenant according to their extension user groups. An extension user group can belong to only one tenant. However, one extension user group can belong to several call pickup groups and several paging groups.
Page 573: Pbx Configuration-[3-3] Group-Call Pickup Group
11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group 11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group Extensions can be assigned to a call pickup group according to their extension user groups. One extension user group can belong to up to 8 call pickup groups. A maximum of 64 call pickup groups can be programmed. To assign extension user groups to call pickup groups easily, click All Setting.
Page 574: Pbx Configuration-[3-3] Group-Call Pickup Group-All Setting
11.3.1 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group—All Setting 11.3.1 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group—All Setting Extensions can be assigned to a call pickup group according to their extension user groups. One extension user group can belong to multiple call pickup groups. Call Pickup Group Name Specifies the name of the call pickup group.
Page 575: Pbx Configuration-[3-4] Group-Paging Group
11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group Extensions can be assigned to a paging group according to their extension user groups. External pagers can also be assigned to a paging group. One extension user group or external pager can belong to multiple paging groups.
Page 576 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group 5.1.2 Group PC Programming Manual...
Page 577: Pbx Configuration-[3-4] Group-Paging Group-All Setting
11.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—All Setting 11.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—All Setting Extensions can be assigned to a paging group according to their extension user groups. One extension user group or external pager can belong to multiple paging groups. Paging Group Name Specifies the name of the paging group.
Page 578: Pbx Configuration-[3-4] Group-Paging Group-External
11.4.2 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—External Pager 11.4.2 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—External Pager External pagers can be assigned to a paging group. One external pager can belong to multiple paging groups. Paging Group Name Indicates the name of the paging group (reference only). Value Range Max.
Page 579: Pbx Configuration-[3-5] Group-Incoming Call Distribution Group
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings 11.5 PBX Configuration—[3-5] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Extensions can be assigned as members of an incoming call distribution group. Calls to an incoming call distribution group are distributed to its member extensions as programmed.
Page 580 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References 2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution Call Waiting Distribution Selects the call waiting distribution method for busy extensions of the incoming call distribution group. Value Range All, Distribution Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References 2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution...
Page 581 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings PC Programming Manual References 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution Tenant Number Specifies the tenant to which the incoming call distribution group belongs, to determine the Time Table and the audio source for the group.
Page 582: Overflow Queuing Busy
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References 2.1.2.2 Internal Call Block CLIP on ICD Group Button Specifies the CLIP number sent to the network when making calls using the ICD Group button. Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References...
Page 583: Overflow No Answer
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings PC Programming Manual References 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table Feature Guide References 2.2.2.6 Overflow Feature Queuing Busy—Queue Call Capacity Specifies the number of calls that can wait in a queue. Value Range None, 1–100 Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings...
Page 584 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause]) Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings PC Programming Manual References 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table Feature Guide References 2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature 2.2.2.6 Overflow Feature...
Page 585: Queuing Time Table
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References 2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature Queuing Time Table Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Group Name Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.
Page 586: Extension No Answer Redirection Time
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Value Range Disable (Ringback Tone), Enable Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Miscellaneous Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group. Value Range Max.
Page 587 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings No. of Unanswered Calls for Automatic Log-out Specifies the number of consecutive unanswered calls before a member extension is automatically logged out from the incoming call distribution group. Value Range None, 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References...
Page 588 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References 2.2.2.5 VIP Call Supervisor Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the incoming call distribution group’s supervisor. The supervisor can monitor and control the status of each member of the group using a 6-line display PT.
Page 589 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Group Name Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Incoming Call Log Memory Specifies the number of unanswered calls to the incoming call distribution group that can be logged in the call log memory.
Page 590 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) Group FWD Call from Extension—Setting Indicates the current FWD status for incoming intercom calls (reference only). Value Range Off, On Maintenance Console Location...
Page 591: Pbx Configuration-[3-5-1] Group-Incoming Call Distribution Group-Group Settings-Member List
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List Each incoming call distribution group can have a maximum of 128 members (extensions) assigned to it, and each member can have its own delayed ringing and Wrap-up time settings. An extension can be a member of multiple incoming call distribution groups.
Page 592: Delayed Ring
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Delayed Ring Specifies the delayed ringing setting of each member. (Applicable when the call distribution method of the incoming call distribution group is set to Ring.) Value Range Immediate, 1–6 Rings, No Ring Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List...
Page 593: Pbx Configuration-[3-5-2] Group-Incoming Call Distribution Group-Queuing Time Table
11.5.2 PBX Configuration—[3-5-2] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table 11.5.2 PBX Configuration—[3-5-2] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table A Queuing Time Table can contain up to 16 sequences which control how calls waiting in a queue are handled. A maximum of 64 Queuing Time Tables can be programmed. Queuing Sequence—Sequence 01–16 Specifies the command activated by the corresponding sequence.
Page 594: Pbx Configuration-[3-5-3] Group-Incoming Call Distribution Group-Miscellaneous
11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous Optional settings related to Incoming Call Distribution Groups can be programmed. Options—Call Log to ICD Group when ICD Member Answered Selects whether answered calls to an ICD Group are also logged in the Incoming Call Log for the group, in addition to the log of the extension that answered the call.
Page 595 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous PC Programming Manual References 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List— Delayed Ring Feature Guide References 2.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY Options—Longest Idle Distribution Selects whether incoming calls are distributed to idle extensions evenly in order (UCD), or to the extension that has been idle the longest (ACD).
Page 596 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous Feature Guide References 2.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out Options—Overflow immediately when All Logout Specifies whether overflow redirection is processed when all members of an ICD group are logged out. Value Range Enable (Queuing Busy Destination), Disable (Keep Queuing) Maintenance Console Location 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous Feature Guide References...
Page 597 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous Options—Announcement of Estimated Waiting Time—Calculated based on (the following time x number of calls in queue) Specifies the method to announce the estimated wait time to calls waiting in an ICD group queue. The amount of time announced is calculated using the time set here for each call in the queue.
Page 598: Pbx Configuration-[3-5-4] Group-Incoming Call Distribution Group-Acd Supervisor
11.5.4 PBX Configuration–[3-5-4] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—ACD Supervisor 11.5.4 PBX Configuration–[3-5-4] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—ACD Supervisor This screen is only available at Installer level. Description After specifying an ICD Group to be monitored, specify a User (User) or User (Administrator) as an ACD supervisor to begin monitoring.
Page 599: Pbx Configuration-[3-6] Group-Extension Hunting Group
11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group 11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group If an extension within an idle extension hunting group is called when it is busy or in DND mode, the call can be redirected to another extension in the same hunting group, according to a pre-programmed hunting type. If there is no idle extension in the group, the call can then be redirected to the overflow destination, which can be different depending on the time mode (day/lunch/break/night).
Page 600 11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group Maintenance Console Location 11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group Feature Guide References 2.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting PC Programming Manual...
Page 601: Pbx Configuration-[3-6] Group-Extension Hunting Group-Member List
11.6.1 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group—Member List 11.6.1 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group—Member List Each hunting group can contain up to 16 extensions. Select the hunting group to programme from the Hunting Group No. list. To assign members to the group, enter the extension numbers in Extension Number or click Extension No.
Page 602: Pbx Configuration-[3-7] Group-Um Group
11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings 11.7 PBX Configuration—[3-7] Group—UM Group 11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings The Unified Messaging (UM) ports of a PBX make up a group, called a UM group. This group has a floating extension number, which can be the destination for incoming calls, redirected calls, transferred calls, etc. When a call is received at the UM group, the Unified Messaging system can direct the caller to leave a voice message or dial a number to reach the desired party.
Page 603 11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Feature Guide References 3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview—UM Ports and the UM Group Overflow to Mailbox for Call to ICD Group Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the called extension to the UM when a call is redirected from an incoming call distribution group to the UM group by Intercept Routing.
Page 604: Pbx Configuration-[3-7-2] Group-Um Group-Unit Settings
11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings A UM group has a floating extension number, which can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls and incoming calls. To assign extension numbers to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 6.4 Tool—Extension List View).
Page 605: Pbx Configuration-[3-7-2] Group-Um Group-Unit Settings-Member List
11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings 11.7.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings—Member List Displays information about all UM ports that belong to the selected UM group. Indicates the UM port number (reference only). Value Range 1–24 Maintenance Console Location 11.7.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings—Member List PC Programming Manual References 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings Extension No.
Page 606: Pbx Configuration-[3-8] Group-Ps Ring Group
11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group 11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group A PS ring group is a group of PS extensions that receives incoming calls. Each group has a floating extension number and name. One PS can belong to multiple PS ring groups. A maximum of 32 PS ring groups can be programmed, each containing up to 128 PS extensions.
Page 607 11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group Feature Guide References 5.2.4.2 PS Ring Group PC Programming Manual...
Page 608: Pbx Configuration-[3-8] Group-Ps Ring Group-Member List
11.8.1 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group—Member List 11.8.1 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group—Member List Each PS Ring Group can have up to 128 PS extensions assigned. Select the group to programme from the PS Ring Group Number list. To assign members to the PS Ring Group, enter directly or click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).
Page 609: Pbx Configuration-[3-9] Group-Conference Group
11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group 11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group A conference group is a group of telephones (extensions or outside destinations) that ring when a conference group call is made. One destination number can be assigned to multiple conference groups. Up to 31 members can be assigned to each of 8 conference groups.
Page 610 11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group Maintenance Console Location 11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group PC Programming Manual References 11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group— Broadcast Mode Feature Guide References 2.15.1 Conference Group Call Automatic Answer w/o Extension Setting Specifies if the extensions of the conference will automatically answer a conference group call, even if Hands-free Answerback is not set for those extensions.
Page 611: Pbx Configuration-[3-9] Group-Conference Group-Member List
11.9.1 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group—Member List 11.9.1 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group—Member List Up to 31 members can be assigned to each conference group. Select the group to programme from the Conference Group No. list. When Broadcast Mode is set to "Disable", only up to 7 members can be assigned to a group. All of these members are automatically allowed to speak when the call starts.
Page 612: Pbx Configuration-[3-10] Group-P2P Group
11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group 11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group Settings for peer-to-peer (P2P) groups can be programmed. P2P Group Name Specifies the name of the P2P group. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group Feature Guide References 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection Bandwidth Control...
Page 613: Pbx Configuration-[3-11] Group-Vm (Dpt) Group
Group—System Settings A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) with DPT Integration can be connected to DPT ports of the PBX. The DPT ports that are connected to the VPS are called a VM (DPT) Group. 2 VM (DPT) Groups can be programmed.
Page 614 11.11.1 PBX Configuration—[3-11-1] Group—VM (DPT) Group—System Settings 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Feature Guide References 2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group Overflow to Mailbox for Call to ICD Group Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the called extension to the VM when a call is redirected from an incoming call distribution group to the VM group by Intercept Routing.
Page 615: Pbx Configuration-[3-11-2] Group-Vm (Dpt) Group-Unit Settings
11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM (DPT) Group—Unit Settings 11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM (DPT) Group—Unit Settings A VM (DPT) group has a floating extension number, which can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls and incoming calls. To assign extension numbers to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View.
Page 616 11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM (DPT) Group—Unit Settings Centralised VM Unit Setting Floating Extension No. (TIE) Specifies the floating extension number of the centralised VM (DPT) group. This floating extension number must start with the number used to access a TIE line or the extensions of another PBX. Value Range Max.
Page 617: Pbx Configuration-[3-11-2] Group-Vm (Dpt) Group-Unit Settings-Member List
11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM (DPT) Group—Unit Settings 11.11.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM (DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List Displays information on the settings of all relevant ports. Only ports set to VM (DPT) in DPT Type—Type of 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Extension—Port Property will be displayed. In addition, the other information displayed here can also be set in 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Extension—Port Property.
Page 618 11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM (DPT) Group—Unit Settings PC Programming Manual References 11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM (DPT) Group—Unit Settings Feature Guide References 5.2.6 Extension Port Configuration VM Unit No. Indicates the unit number of the connected VPS (reference only). Value Range 1, 2 Maintenance Console Location 11.11.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM (DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List...
Page 619 11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM (DPT) Group—Unit Settings Maintenance Console Location 11.11.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM (DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List PC Programming Manual References 11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM (DPT) Group—Unit Settings 11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM (DTMF) Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References 2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group 2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).
Page 620: Pbx Configuration-[3-12] Group-Vm (Dtmf) Group
Group—System Settings A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) with DTMF Integration can be connected to SLT ports of the PBX. The SLT ports that are connected to the VPS are called a VM (DTMF) Group. 2 VM (DTMF) Groups can be programmed.
Page 621 11.12.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-1] Group—VM (DTMF) Group—System Settings Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause]) Maintenance Console Location 11.12.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-1] Group—VM (DTMF) Group—System Settings VM DTMF Status Signal—Answer Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the called extension has answered the call. Value Range Max.
Page 622 11.12.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-1] Group—VM (DTMF) Group—System Settings Maintenance Console Location 11.12.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-1] Group—VM (DTMF) Group—System Settings VM DTMF Status Signal—FWD to VM Busy Tone Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the call has been forwarded to the VPS and all ports of the VPS are busy.
Page 623 11.12.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-1] Group—VM (DTMF) Group—System Settings Feature Guide References 2.20.1 Message Waiting VM DTMF Command—Switching to AA Specifies the DTMF command the PBX sends to the VPS to switch from VM Service Mode to AA Service Mode. Value Range Max.
Page 624 11.12.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-1] Group—VM (DTMF) Group—System Settings Value Range 0.5 s, 1.0 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s Maintenance Console Location 11.12.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-1] Group—VM (DTMF) Group—System Settings Timing—Waiting Time before Sending VM DTMF Status Signal Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before sending the DTMF status signal to the VPS after the VPS has finished dialling.
Page 625 11.12.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-1] Group—VM (DTMF) Group—System Settings Others—Intercept Routing to the VPS Sequence Specifies which DTMF commands the VPS receives from the PBX when a call is intercepted to the VPS, so that the VPS can answer the call either with a mailbox or in the AA service mode. It is also possible to send no DTMF signal to the VPS.
Page 626: Pbx Configuration-[3-12-2] Group-Vm (Dtmf) Group-Group Settings
11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM (DTMF) Group—Group Settings 11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM (DTMF) Group—Group Settings A VM (DTMF) group has a floating extension number, and can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls and incoming calls. To assign members to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View.
Page 627 11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM (DTMF) Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References 2.28.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration PC Programming Manual...
Page 628: Pbx Configuration-[3-12-2] Group-Vm (Dtmf) Group-Group Settings-Member List
11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM (DTMF) Group—Group Settings 11.12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM (DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member List Select the group to programme from the VM (DTMF) Group Number list. To assign members to the group, enter directly or click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).
Page 629: Pbx Configuration-[4] Extension
Section 12 PBX Configuration—[4] Extension This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Extension menu of the PBX Configuration Menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 630: Pbx Configuration-[4-1] Extension-Wired Extension
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings 12.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1] Extension—Wired Extension 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings For each slot in which an extension card is installed, a certain number of extension ports are displayed. For each extension port, various extension settings can be assigned. To search for a specific extension, enter the extension number or the extension name in the search box and click Find Next.
Page 631 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings DPT (S-DPT): Digital XDP port of DPT port (DLC) ISDN: ISDN port (PRI) IP-EXT: IP-Extension port (V-IPEXT) SIP: General SIP Extension port (V-SIPEXT) SIP-MLT: KX-UT series SIP phone/S-PS/SIP-CS Extension port (V-UTEXT) UM: Unified Messaging System Extension port Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Telephone Type...
Page 632 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Specifies the COS of the extension. Value Range 1–64 Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS) Extension PIN Specifies the PIN of the extension.
Page 633 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls in each time mode for Intercept Routing–No Answer and...
Page 634 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.1.1.5 Intercept Routing Intercept No Answer Time Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name...
Page 635 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings CLIP Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max.
Page 636 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting— Subscriber Number 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP— CLIP ID Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) CLIR Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number on the called party’s telephone when making a public network trunk call.
Page 637 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Two-way Recording Specifies whether to enable the two-way recording feature for the extension using the Unified Messaging system.
Page 638 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Wireless XDP / Shared Extension Specifies the extension number of the PS with which Wireless XDP Parallel Mode is established. To enable Wireless XDP Parallel Mode, the PS must be turned off once and then turned on after assigning this setting. This setting also specifies the sub extension for the main extension of a one-numbered extension.
Page 639 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Transfer Recall Destination Specifies the transfer recall destination when an extension user transfers a call with the Call Transfer without Announcement feature and the transferred call is not answered within a certain time period. Value Range Max.
Page 640 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call Selects the method of receiving call waiting notification from other extensions. Value Range Off: No notification BSS: Tone from the handset or built-in speaker...
Page 641 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start (s) Feature Guide References 2.6.6 Hot Line Pickup Dial No.
Page 642 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Call Pickup Deny Specifies whether calls can be picked up by other extensions.
Page 643 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Max. 16 characters Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.20.2 Absent Message Charge Limit Specifies the maximum limit of call charges allowed for the extension. When this limit is reached, the extension cannot be used to make further trunk calls.
Page 644 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Option 4 Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max.
Page 645 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range No Line: No line is selected. Select a line by pressing the desired Line Access button to answer a call. Ringing Line: The longest ringing call is selected. PDN: The call arriving at any PDN button is selected. F-1–F-84: The call arriving at a flexible button (F-1–F-84) is selected.
Page 646 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings LCS Answer Mode Specifies whether the extension’s mailbox is monitored in Hands-free or Private mode. Value Range Hands free: Monitor through the built-in speaker Private: Monitor through the handset or the built-in speaker after hearing a warning tone Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References...
Page 647 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.21.4 Display Information Incoming Call Display Selects which caller information is shown on the first line of the extension’s display. Value Range Caller ID Name, CO Line Name, DDI/DID Name Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.21.4 Display Information...
Page 648 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.4.4 Hands-free Answerback Option 6 Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name...
Page 649: Paging Deny
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Flexible Button Programming Mode Specifies whether the extension user can modify all flexible buttons without limitation, or only the One-touch Dialling buttons. When the mode is set to One-touch Dial, there is no need to enter "2" before the number when customising a One-touch Dialling button.
Page 650 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.17.1 Paging Option 7 Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension.
Page 651 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate 2.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA) Incoming Call Log Memory Specifies the number of incoming trunk calls that are retained in the extension’s Incoming Call Log memory. Value Range 0–100 Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References...
Page 652 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Option 8 Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max.
Page 653: Slt Mw Mode
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Incoming Call Wait Timer for Extension Caller ID Specifies the length of time that the ringing for a call is delayed when the call follows immediately after the previous unanswered call. When receiving two calls in quick succession (e.g., when a call waiting in a queue is directed to an extension immediately after the previous unanswered call stops ringing), some SLTs require a pause, after the first call stops ringing, to receive the second call’s Caller ID information.
Page 654 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out Option 9 Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension.
Page 655 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—Port Number— Built-in Communication Assistant Server Feature Guide References 2.26.2 CA (Communication Assistant) Mobile Extension Specifies whether to enable or disable mobile extension features (with a cellular phone or other outside destination) for the extension.
Page 656 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings FWD Mode for Call from CO Indicates the forwarding type of incoming trunk calls (reference only). Value Range None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND Feature Guide References...
Page 657 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) FWD Destination for Call from Extension Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming intercom calls (reference only). Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause]) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References...
Page 658 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) PC Programming Manual...
Page 659: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-1] Extension-Wired Extension-Extension Settings-Clip Generate
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings 12.1.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together. Pre-assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten. If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded. Location Entry—Beginning Entry Location (Ext.
Page 660 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range 0–5 Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) Parameter—Head of ID Specifies a prefix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers.
Page 661 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) PC Programming Manual...
Page 662: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-2] Extension-Wired Extension-Fwd/Dnd
12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND For each extension, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be programmed for incoming intercom and trunk calls. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list. To copy the FWD/DND settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy to.
Page 663: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-3] Extension-Wired Extension-Speed Dial
12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial 12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial Personal Speed Dialling allows extension users to dial frequently dialled numbers using two-digit speed dialling numbers (00–99). A maximum of 100 Personal Speed Dialling numbers can be programmed for each extension.
Page 664: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-4] Extension-Wired Extension-Flexible Button
12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Overview Each flexible button can be customised to allow one-touch access to a certain feature. A maximum of 84 flexible buttons can be customised for each extension. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
Page 665 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Maintenance Console Location 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button PC Programming Manual References 12.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy Parameter Selection (for Single CO) Specifies the trunk to be accessed. Value Range 1–190 Maintenance Console Location 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button...
Page 666 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out) Specifies which incoming call distribution groups that the extension belongs to are logged in to or logged out from. Value Range None: The incoming call distribution group is selected manually. All: All incoming call distribution groups that the extension belongs to.
Page 667 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Value Range Table 1–Table 8 Maintenance Console Location 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 5.1.4 Time Service Parameter Selection (for SDN) Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button. Value Range Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings, No Ring Maintenance Console Location...
Page 668 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Extension Number (for Message Waiting) Specifies the number of an extension or floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which messages are checked. If this cell is left empty, the extension will check its own messages only. Value Range Max.
Page 669 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Maintenance Console Location 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY Extension Number (for Call Log) Specifies the extension’s own number or the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which call log information is displayed.
Page 670 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Extension Number (for Two-way Record) Specifies the floating extension number of the UM/VM (DPT) group containing the extension’s mailbox. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration 3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview...
Page 671 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Note that the extension specified here must have a PDN button registered for the SDN button to function. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension Extension Name...
Page 672 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 4.1.2.10 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol Dial (for NDSS) Specifies the network extension number of the extension to be accessed using Network Direct Station Selection. Note that only extension numbers that have been previously registered in 17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4] Private Network—NDSS Key Table can be specified here.
Page 673 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 5.1.4 Time Service Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, ICD Group, SDN) Specifies the ring tone type. Value Range IP-PT (except KX-NT265/KX-NT321): 1–30 KX-NT265/KX-NT321: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 1 is heard.) S-PS: Not available.
Page 674: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-4] Extension-Wired Extension-Flexible Button-Flexible Button Data Copy
12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button 12.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy The flexible button settings (including key label settings) of an extension can be copied to different extensions. Destination Extension Line Select the number and name of the extension that will receive the copied settings. Multiple extensions can be selected.
Page 675: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-5] Extension-Wired Extension-Pf Button
12.1.5 PBX Configuration—[4-1-5] Extension—Wired Extension—PF Button 12.1.5 PBX Configuration—[4-1-5] Extension—Wired Extension—PF Button Each Programmable Feature (PF) button can be customised to access a certain feature with one touch. A maximum of 12 PF buttons can be customised for each extension. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
Page 676: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-6] Extension-Wired Extension-Ndss Link Data - Send
12.1.6 PBX Configuration—[4-1-6] Extension—Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send 12.1.6 PBX Configuration—[4-1-6] Extension—Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension’s status data over the network. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 677: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-7] Extension-Wired Extension-Clip Id Table
12.1.7 PBX Configuration—[4-1-7] Extension—Wired Extension—CLIP ID Table 12.1.7 PBX Configuration—[4-1-7] Extension—Wired Extension—CLIP ID Table Up to 8 CLIP IDs can be set for each wired extension. Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the extension (reference only). Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.7 PBX Configuration—[4-1-7] Extension—Wired Extension—CLIP ID Table Extension Name...
Page 678: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-8] Extension-Wired Extension-Simplified Voice Message
12.1.8 PBX Configuration-[4-1-8] Extension-Wired Extension-Simplified Voice Message 12.1.8 PBX Configuration-[4-1-8] Extension-Wired Extension-Simplified Voice Message The built-in Simplified Voice Message feature can be provided for each extension. This screen allows you to specify which extension uses this feature, and the maximum number of messages that can be stored for each extension.
Page 679 12.1.8 PBX Configuration-[4-1-8] Extension-Wired Extension-Simplified Voice Message Maintenance Console Location 12.1.8 PBX Configuration-[4-1-8] Extension-Wired Extension-Simplified Voice Message PC Programming Manual References 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension (reference only). Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12.1.8 PBX Configuration-[4-1-8] Extension-Wired Extension-Simplified Voice Message PC Programming Manual References...
Page 680: Pbx Configuration-[4-2] Extension-Portable Station
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings 12.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2] Extension—Portable Station 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings For each Portable Station (PS), various extension settings can be assigned. A maximum of 128 PSs can be programmed. To copy the settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy to. The copied data includes FWD/DND and flexible button settings.
Page 681 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Value Range Portable Station Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings User Group Specifies the extension user group to which the PS belongs. The extension user group is used to compose tenants, call pickup groups and paging groups. Value Range 1–32 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 682 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend: Keeping PINs secret. Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed. Changing PINs frequently. To change an extension PIN: Click Edit under Extension PIN for the extension to change. In the window that appears, enter the new extension PIN and then enter it again to confirm it.
Page 683 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls in each time mode for Intercept Routing–No Answer and Intercept Routing–DND. Note that Intercept Routing–Busy calls are routed using Intercept Destination—When Called Party is Busy below.
Page 684 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No. Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station—...
Page 685 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No. Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station—...
Page 686 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) CLIR Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number on the called party’s telephone when making a public network trunk call. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings...
Page 687 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Two-way Recording Specifies whether to enable the two-way recording feature for the PS using the Unified Messaging system. Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings...
Page 688 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name Ring Pattern Table Specifies the Ring Tone Pattern Table to be used by the PS. Value Range 1–8 Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 10.8.1 PBX Configuration—[2-8-1] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO 10.8.2 PBX Configuration—[2-8-2] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from DOORPHONE...
Page 689 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings ARS Itemised Code Specifies the itemised billing code used by the ARS feature for identifying the calls made from the PS for accounting and billing purposes. Value Range Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References...
Page 690 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call Selects the method of receiving call waiting notification from other extensions. Value Range Off: No notification BSS: Tone from the handset or built-in speaker OHCA: If selected, a BSS notification will be received. W-OHCA: If selected, a BSS notification will be received.
Page 691 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.6.6 Hot Line Pickup Dial No. Specifies the number to be dialled automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is active. Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]) Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References...
Page 692 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Call Pickup Deny Specifies whether calls can be picked up by other extensions. Value Range Disable: Allows other extension users to pick up calls to your PS Enable: Prevents other extension users from picking up calls to your PS Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References...
Page 693 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point in 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge. Value Range 0–9999999 Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel &...
Page 694 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Outgoing Preferred Line Selects the line to be seized after going off-hook to make a call. Value Range No Line: No line is seized. Idle: An idle trunk is seized automatically from the programmed trunk groups. ICM/PDN: An extension line is seized, or, for a PDN extension, an idle PDN button is selected.
Page 695 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Value Range CW Tone 1, CW Tone 2 Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.10.4.2 Call Waiting Tone LCS Recording Mode Specifies whether to continue or stop recording the message in the PS’s mailbox when the PS user answers a call that was being monitored.
Page 696 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name Display Language Selects the display language of the PS. Value Range Language1–Language5 Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.21.4 Display Information...
Page 697: Svm Lock
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Option 6 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station—...
Page 698 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Value Range Unlock, Lock Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.19.2 Incoming Call Log Option 7 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Value Range Max.
Page 699 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Flash Mode during CO Conversation Selects the function of the FLASH/RECALL button during a trunk conversation. Value Range EFA, Terminate, Flash Recall Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate...
Page 700 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings ISDN Bearer Selects the ISDN bearer mode. When Automatic is selected, the bearer mode is set automatically depending on the type of the PS. Value Range Automatic, Speech, Audio Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY Option 8...
Page 701 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Wrap-up Timer Specifies the length of time that must pass after completing a call before a PS will accept another call when logged in as a member of an Incoming Call Distribution Group.
Page 702 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name PDN Delayed Ringing Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls to a PDN extension (an extension with one or more PDN buttons).
Page 703 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Mobile Extension Specifies whether to enable or disable mobile extension features (with a cellular phone or other outside destination) for the extension. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.27.1 Cellular Phone Features—SUMMARY FWD / DND...
Page 704 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings FWD Mode for Call from CO Indicates the forwarding type of incoming trunk calls (reference only). Value Range None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Guide References...
Page 705 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) FWD Destination for Call from Extension Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming intercom calls (reference only). Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause]) Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References...
Page 706 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) PC Programming Manual...
Page 707: Pbx Configuration-[4-2-1] Extension-Portable Station-Extension Settings-Clip Generate
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings 12.2.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together. Pre-assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten. If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded. Location Entry—Beginning Entry Location (Ext.
Page 708 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Value Range 0–4 Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate PC Programming Manual References 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) Parameter—Head of ID Specifies a prefix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers.
Page 709 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) PC Programming Manual...
Page 710: Pbx Configuration-[4-2-2] Extension-Portable Station-Fwd/Dnd
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND For each PS, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be programmed for incoming intercom and trunk calls. Select the desired PS from the Extension Number / Name list. To copy FWD/DND values from one location to another, click Copy to.
Page 711: Pbx Configuration-[4-2-3] Extension-Portable Station-Flexible Button
12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Each flexible button can be customised to allow one-touch access to a certain feature. A maximum of 12 flexible buttons can be customised for each PS. Select the desired PS from the Extension Number / Name list. To copy values from one location to another, click the Copy to button.
Page 712 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Maintenance Console Location 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.5.5.3 Trunk Access Parameter Selection (for Call Park) Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically, or in a specific parking zone. Value Range Automatic, Specific Maintenance Console Location...
Page 713 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 5.1.4 Time Service Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change) Specifies the TRS/Barring level to be used temporarily on a certain PS. Value Range Level 1–Level 7 Maintenance Console Location 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) 2.7.4 Dial Tone Transfer...
Page 714 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension Extension Number (for DSS) Specifies the number of an extension to be accessed. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Extension Number (for ICD Group) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be accessed.
Page 715 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY Extension Number (for Group Fwd (External)) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which trunk calls are forwarded. Value Range Max.
Page 716 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature Extension Number (for Two-way Record) Specifies the floating extension number of the UM/VM (DPT) group containing the PS’s mailbox. Value Range Max.
Page 717 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Maintenance Console Location 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.28.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration 2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration 3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview Extension Number (for SDN) Specifies the floating extension number of the corresponding (owner) extension for the SDN button. Note that the extension specified here must have a PDN button registered for the SDN button to function.
Page 718 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Dial (for ISDN Service) Specifies the number required to access the telephone company’s ISDN service. Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]) Maintenance Console Location 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References...
Page 719 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Value Range Park 00–Park 99 Maintenance Console Location 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.13.2 Call Park Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer) Specifies the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record conversations using One-touch Two-way Transfer.
Page 720: Pbx Configuration-[4-2-3] Extension-Portable Station-Flexible Button-Flexible Button Data Copy
12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button 12.2.3.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy The flexible button settings of a PS can be copied to different PSs. Destination Extension Line Select the number and name of the PS that will receive the copied settings. Multiple PSs can be selected. To select all PSs at once, click Select All.
Page 721: Pbx Configuration-[4-2-4] Extension-Portable Station-Ndss Link Data - Send
12.2.4 PBX Configuration—[4-2-4] Extension—Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send 12.2.4 PBX Configuration—[4-2-4] Extension—Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension’s status data over the network. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 722: Pbx Configuration-[4-2-5] Extension-Portable Station-Clip Id Table
12.2.5 PBX Configuration—[4-2-5] Extension—Portable Station—CLIP ID Table 12.2.5 PBX Configuration—[4-2-5] Extension—Portable Station—CLIP ID Table Up to 8 CLIP IDs can be set for each wireless extension. Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.2.5 PBX Configuration—[4-2-5] Extension—Portable Station—CLIP ID Table Extension Name...
Page 723: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-6]Extension-Portable Station-Simplified Voice Message
12.2.6 PBX Configuration-[4-1-6]Extension—Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message 12.2.6 PBX Configuration-[4-1-6]Extension—Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message The built-in Simplified Voice Message feature can be provided for each PS. This screen allows you to specify which extension uses this feature, and the maximum number of messages that can be stored for each extension.
Page 724 12.2.6 PBX Configuration-[4-1-6]Extension—Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message PC Programming Manual References 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot Feature Guide References 2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) Maximum of SVM Log Specifies the maximum number of voice messages (not including greeting messages) that can be stored for the extension.
Page 725: Pbx Configuration-[4-3] Extension-Dss Console
12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console A DSS Console can be used in conjunction with a PT. A maximum of 8 DSS Consoles can be programmed. The DPT Type—Type of the extension port that DSS Console is connected must be set to DSS in 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Extension—Port Property.
Page 726 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console Parameter Selection (for Single CO) Specifies the trunk to be accessed. Value Range 1–190 Maintenance Console Location 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console Feature Guide References 2.5.5.3 Trunk Access Parameter Selection (for Group CO) Specifies the trunk group to be accessed. Value Range 1–64 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 727 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console All: All incoming call distribution groups that the paired extension belongs to. Incoming Group: A pre-specified incoming call distribution group Maintenance Console Location 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console Feature Guide References 2.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out Parameter Selection (for Time Service) Selects which time modes are switched manually.
Page 728 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console Feature Guide References 5.1.4 Time Service Parameter Selection (for SDN) Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button. Value Range Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings, No Ring Maintenance Console Location 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console Feature Guide References...
Page 729 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Both)) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which both intercom and trunk calls are forwarded. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console Feature Guide References 2.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features...
Page 730 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console Extension Number (for Call Log) Specifies the paired extension’s number or the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which call log information is displayed. If the cell is left empty, the paired extension will display its own call log information.
Page 731 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console Feature Guide References 2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration 3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer) Specifies the floating extension number of the UM/VM (DPT) group containing the desired mailbox. Value Range Max.
Page 732 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension, when an extension number is specified (reference only). Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console Dial (for One-touch) Specifies the number to be dialled. The PBX can have a maximum of 2000 One-touch Dialling buttons for extensions and DSS Consoles.
Page 733 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console Maintenance Console Location 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console Feature Guide References 4.2.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service) Specifies the Time Table to be used for changing time modes in the Automatic Switching mode. Value Range Maintenance Console Location 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console...
Page 734 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console Feature Guide References 2.13.2 Call Park Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer) Specifies the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record conversations using One-touch Two-way Transfer. (For example, a secretary can record a conversation into the mailbox of a boss.) If the cell is left empty, the extension user must specify the number of an extension each time.
Page 735: Pbx Configuration-[4-3] Extension-Dss Console-Dss Key Data Copy
12.3.1 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console—DSS key data copy 12.3.1 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console—DSS key data copy The flexible DSS button settings (including key label settings) of a DSS Console can be copied to different DSS Consoles. Select the DSS Console that has the setting to copy to other DSS Consoles from the DSS Console No./Pair Extension list, then click Copy to.
Page 736 12.3.1 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console—DSS key data copy PC Programming Manual...
Page 737: Pbx Configuration-[5] Optional Device
Section 13 PBX Configuration—[5] Optional Device This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Optional Device menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 738: Pbx Configuration-[5-1] Optional Device-Doorphone
13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone The settings to establish doorphone calls can be programmed. To assign destinations for doorphone calls easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting). The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 739 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone PC Programming Manual References 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table Feature Guide References 2.18.1 Doorphone Call Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number for the doorphone port in order to apply the Time Table (day/lunch/break/night). Value Range 1–8 Maintenance Console Location 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone...
Page 740 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone Service Group Number Specifies the Service Group number sent to the Unified Messaging system when the incoming call destination is the floating extension number of a UM group. The Service Group number is used to allow the Unified Messaging system to send the applicable greeting message to the caller.
Page 741: Pbx Configuration-[5-2] Optional Device-External
13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—External Pager 13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—External Pager Settings for the external pager (external speaker) can be specified. Click Extension List View to view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types (see 6.4 Tool—Extension List View). Indicates the External Pager ID (reference only).
Page 742: Pbx Configuration-[5-3] Optional Device-Voice Message
13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System 13.3 PBX Configuration—[5-3] Optional Device—Voice Message 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System Direct Inward System Access (DISA) enables outside callers to access specific PBX features as if the caller were using an SLT extension of the PBX. For more information on DISA, see "2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)"...
Page 743 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System Value Range Busy Tone, Enable, Busy Message Maintenance Console Location 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System DISA Intercept—Intercept when all DISA ports are busy Selects how DISA calls are handled if all DISA ports are currently in use. Value Range to Operator, to AA-0, to AA-9, Disable (Busy Tone) Maintenance Console Location...
Page 744 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System CO-CO with DISA—DISA to Private Network Specifies whether the DISA port is released when a trunk-to-private trunk call using DISA is established. To enable this setting, " CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Private Network" on this screen should be set to "Enable".
Page 745 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System PC Programming Manual References 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1— CO-CO with DISA—DISA to Private Network CO-CO with DISA—Transfer by DTMF "#" (Activation Key Required) Specifies whether an outside party such as a cellular phone can transfer a trunk call to an extension within the PBX by dialling "#"...
Page 746 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System Maintenance Console Location 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System DISA Cyclic Tone Option—Tone on Maximum Time (ms) Specifies the maximum duration of the cyclic tone that will be recognised by the PBX. When the tone sent from the telephone company is shorter than the value set here, the PBX recognises it as a tone-on.
Page 747 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System Maintenance Console Location 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System PC Programming Manual References 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Guide References 2.24.4 Timed Reminder PC Programming Manual...
Page 748: Pbx Configuration-[5-3-2] Optional Device-Voice Message-Disa Message
13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message Outgoing messages (OGM) for DISA calls can be specified. A maximum of 64 OGMs can be programmed. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 6.4 Tool—Extension List View).
Page 749 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message Maintenance Console Location 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Guide References 2.30.2 Outgoing Message (OGM) 2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Busy / DND Message No. Selects the OGM to be played for the caller when the destination party is busy or sets DND. Value Range None, 1–64 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 750: Pbx Configuration-[5-3-3] Option Device - Voice Message - Svm
13.3.3 PBX Configuration-[5-3-3] Option Device - Voice Message - SVM 13.3.3 PBX Configuration-[5-3-3] Option Device - Voice Message - SVM Settings related to Built-in Simplified Voice Message feature can be specified. This feature can be accessed via the MPR card or ESVM card. SVM—Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number used to access the SVM feature.
Page 751 13.3.3 PBX Configuration-[5-3-3] Option Device - Voice Message - SVM 12.2.6 PBX Configuration-[4-1-6]Extension—Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message Feature Guide References 2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) SVM Cyclic Tone Detection Specifies the SVM cyclic tone detection mode. Value Range Fixed, Option Maintenance Console Location 13.3.3 PBX Configuration-[5-3-3] Option Device - Voice Message - SVM Feature Guide References...
Page 752 13.3.3 PBX Configuration-[5-3-3] Option Device - Voice Message - SVM Maintenance Console Location 13.3.3 PBX Configuration-[5-3-3] Option Device - Voice Message - SVM PC Programming Manual References 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot Feature Guide References 2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) SVM Cyclic Tone Option—Repeating Times of ON/OFF for Detection Specifies the number of times the tone pattern (a set of tone-on and tone-off) must be received to establish reception of the cyclic tone.
Page 753: Pbx Configuration-[5-4] Optional Device-External Relay
13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay 13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay Settings related to external relays can be programmed. Before programming these settings, For Output - Device Type must be set to "Relay" in the DOORPHONE card’s property settings. (® 9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property) The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference.
Page 754 13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay Feature Guide References 2.18.4 External Relay Control COS Number Specifies the Class of Service (COS) number. COS programming determines the extensions that are able to activate relays. Value Range 1–64 Maintenance Console Location 13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay PC Programming Manual References 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device &...
Page 755: Pbx Configuration-[5-5] Optional Device-External Sensor
13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor 13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor Settings related to external sensors can be programmed. To assign destinations for sensor calls easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting). The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 756 13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor Feature Guide References 2.18.3 External Sensor Tenant No. Specifies the tenant to which the sensor belongs, to determine the Time Table for the sensor. (The tenant number corresponds to the Time Table number.) Value Range 1–8 Maintenance Console Location 13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor...
Page 757 13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor Feature Guide References 2.18.3 External Sensor 5.1.3 Tenant Service Sensor Alarm—Email Comment Specifies comments in the e-mail received when the sensor detects an alarm. Value Range Max.256 characters Maintenance Console Location 13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor Feature Guide References 2.18.3 External Sensor 5.1.3 Tenant Service...
Page 758 13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor PC Programming Manual...
Page 759: Pbx Configuration-[6] Feature
Section 14 PBX Configuration—[6] Feature This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Feature menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 760: Pbx Configuration-[6-1] Feature-System Speed Dial
14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial The System Speed Dialling Table is used to store frequently dialled numbers as well as callers who should be automatically routed to certain extensions when they call (Calling Line Identification [CLI] distribution). The System Speed Dialling Table is available for all extension users when making or receiving a call.
Page 761 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number Specifies the telephone number (including the Trunk Access number) or feature number assigned to the System Speed Dialling number. Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]) Maintenance Console Location 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial Feature Guide References...
Page 762: Pbx Configuration-[6-2] Feature-Hotel & Charge
14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Various settings related to the hospitality features of the PBX can be set. Main Hotel Operator—Extension 1–4 Specifies the numbers of the extensions designated as hotel operators. Value Range Max.
Page 763 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Maintenance Console Location 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge PC Programming Manual References 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 2.24.4 Timed Reminder SMDR for External Hotel Application 2—Printing Message 1–8 Specifies the text of the message output on SMDR when this Printing Message is selected from an extension.
Page 764 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Bill Checkout Billing—Billing for Guest Activates call billing features for the PBX. Value Range OFF, ON Maintenance Console Location 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge PC Programming Manual References 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Feature Guide References 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room Checkout Billing—LCD for "Telephone"...
Page 765 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Checkout Billing—LCD for "Others" Specifies the name of charge item 3 as shown on the display of the hotel operator extension when entering room charges. Value Range Max. 12 characters Maintenance Console Location 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Feature Guide References 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room Checkout Billing—Bill (SMDR) for "Telephone"...
Page 766 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Maintenance Console Location 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Feature Guide References 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room SMDR for External Hotel Application—Language for Bill (SMDR) Specifies the language used for standard items shown on guest bills printed out using the Call Billing feature. Value Range Language 1–Language 5 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 767 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Charge Margin & Tax—Margin Rate for "Telephone" (%) Specifies the percentage margin to be added to telephone charges displayed on the guest bill. Value Range 0.00–99.99 % Maintenance Console Location 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Feature Guide References 2.22.3 Call Charge Services 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room...
Page 768 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Value Range 0.00–99.99 % Maintenance Console Location 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Feature Guide References 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point Specifies the number of digits to display after the decimal point for the currency in use. Value Range 0–6 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 769 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit 14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code— Budget Management Feature Guide References 2.21.4 Display Information 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 2.22.3 Call Charge Services 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room Charge Options—Currency Display Position Specifies whether the currency characters are displayed before or after the call charge.
Page 770 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit Feature Guide References 2.7.2 Budget Management Charge Options—Meter Start on Answer Detection Enables the PBX to start counting the call charge when the answer signal from the telephone company is detected.
Page 771: Pbx Configuration-[6-3] Feature-Verification Code
14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code 14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code A verification code is used to override the Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) of the extension in use to make a certain trunk call, or to identify the call for accounting and billing purposes. A maximum of 1000 verification codes can be programmed with other related parameters.
Page 772: Itemised Billing Code For Ars
14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code Value Range Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code Feature Guide References 2.7.6 Verification Code Entry COS Number Specifies the COS that applies when making a trunk call with the verification code. Value Range 1–64 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 773: Budget Management
14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code Budget Management Specifies the limit of the call charge that will be counted on the verification code. The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point in 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge. Value Range 0–9999999 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 774: Pbx Configuration-[6-4] Feature-Second Dial Tone
14.4 PBX Configuration—[6-4] Feature—Second Dial Tone 14.4 PBX Configuration—[6-4] Feature—Second Dial Tone A programmed Pause time can be inserted automatically between the Second Dial Tone Waiting code and the following digits. When a programmed Second Dial Tone Waiting code is dialled after seizing a trunk, a pre-programmed number of pauses are inserted after the code.
Page 775: Pbx Configuration-[6-5] Feature-Absent Message
14.5 PBX Configuration—[6-5] Feature—Absent Message 14.5 PBX Configuration—[6-5] Feature—Absent Message When a display PT user calls an extension, a message is shown on the caller’s telephone display describing the reason for absence. A maximum of 8 Absent Messages can be programmed, and any extension user can select one of them.
Page 776: Pbx Configuration-[6-6] Feature-Tenant
14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant A maximum of 8 tenants can share the PBX. Each tenant is composed of specified extension user groups. The PBX offers each tenant its own Time Table and system resources. To assign extensions as operators easily, click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).
Page 777: System Speed Dial
14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant Value Range Off: ARS is disabled. On for Local Access Operation: ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using any Idle Line Access method. On for Any CO Access Operation: ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using any Trunk Access method.
Page 778 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant Maintenance Console Location 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant Feature Guide References 2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/System 5.1.3 Tenant Service PC Programming Manual...
Page 779: Pbx Configuration-[7] Trs
Section 15 PBX Configuration—[7] TRS This section serves as reference operating instructions for the TRS menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 780: Pbx Configuration-[7-1] Trs-Denied Code
15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied Code 15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied Code Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. Each time mode of every COS is assigned one of the seven TRS/Barring levels. TRS/Barring level 7 provides the maximum restriction (all trunk calls are prohibited) and level 1 provides the minimum (all trunk calls are allowed).
Page 781: Pbx Configuration-[7-2] Trs-Exception Code
15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception Code 15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception Code Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. Each time mode of every COS is assigned one of the seven TRS/Barring levels. TRS/Barring level 7 provides the maximum restriction (all trunk calls are prohibited) and level 1 provides the minimum (all trunk calls are allowed).
Page 782: Pbx Configuration-[7-3] Trs-Special Carrier
15.3 PBX Configuration—[7-3] TRS—Special Carrier 15.3 PBX Configuration—[7-3] TRS—Special Carrier If the PBX has access to multiple telephone companies, a Special Carrier Access Code is required each time a trunk call is made. By programming these Special Carrier Access Codes here, Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) can restrict or allow calls to be made by ignoring the codes and looking at the telephone number only.
Page 783: Pbx Configuration-[7-4] Trs-Emergency Dial
15.4 PBX Configuration—[7-4] TRS—Emergency Dial 15.4 PBX Configuration—[7-4] TRS—Emergency Dial Any extension user can dial the programmed emergency numbers at any time after seizing a trunk. The restrictions imposed on the extension, such as Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring), Account Code—Forced mode, and Extension Dial Lock are disregarded.
Page 784: Pbx Configuration-[7-5] Trs-Miscellaneous
15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. The following optional settings can be programmed to activate a TRS/Barring check, override TRS/Barring, or switch between TRS/Barring methods. TRS Override by System Speed Dialling Enables an outgoing trunk call to override TRS/Barring when the call is made using System Speed Dialling.
Page 785 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous Maintenance Console Location 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous PC Programming Manual References 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Feature Guide References 2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Dial Digits Limitation After Answering—Dial Digits Specifies a limit to be placed on the number of digits which can be dialled after an extension user receives a trunk call.
Page 786 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous Deny Table N + Except Table N: Each level has its own separate set of denied codes and exception codes, which are only applied to that level. Maintenance Console Location 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous Feature Guide References 2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) PC Programming Manual...
Page 787: Pbx Configuration-[8] Ars
Section 16 PBX Configuration—[8] ARS This section serves as reference operating instructions for the ARS menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 788: Pbx Configuration-[8-1] Ars-System Setting
16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting 16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting Automatic Route Selection (ARS) automatically selects the appropriate carrier at the time a trunk call is made, according to the programmed settings. The user-dialled number will be checked and modified in order to connect it to the appropriate carrier.
Page 789: Pbx Configuration-[8-2] Ars-Leading Number
16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number 16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number Specifies the area codes and/or telephone numbers as leading numbers that will be routed by the ARS feature. A maximum of 1000 different leading numbers can be programmed, and each leading number can select a Routing Plan Table number, which determines the ARS procedure.
Page 790 16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number Maintenance Console Location 16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number Feature Guide References 2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) PC Programming Manual...
Page 791: Pbx Configuration-[8-3] Ars-Routing Plan Time
16.3 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time 16.3 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time The start and end times of a maximum of 4 different time blocks are shown for each day of the week. There are 48 Routing Plan Tables, and each Routing Plan Table can have its own time blocks. Select the desired Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list.
Page 792: Pbx Configuration-[8-3] Ars-Routing Plan Time-Time Setting
16.3.1 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time—Time Setting 16.3.1 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time—Time Setting The start times of a maximum of 4 different time blocks can be programmed for each day of the week, for the selected Routing Plan. Each time block automatically ends when the subsequent block begins. Time-A–D—Setting Enables the setting of the start time for each time block.
Page 793: Pbx Configuration-[8-4] Ars-Routing Plan Priority
16.4 PBX Configuration—[8-4] ARS—Routing Plan Priority 16.4 PBX Configuration—[8-4] ARS—Routing Plan Priority The carrier priority (1 through 6) in a Routing Plan Table can be programmed for each time zone of each day of the week. Select the desired Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list. Select the desired day of the week by clicking the applicable tab.
Page 794: Pbx Configuration-[8-5] Ars-Carrier
16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier Carrier It is possible to specify how user-dialled numbers are modified for connecting to the appropriate carrier. A maximum of 48 different carriers can be programmed to be used with the ARS feature. Carrier Name Specifies the carrier name.
Page 795 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier CLIP Table No. Sets the CLIP numbers established for each extension (wired/wireless) of a carrier. The CLIP IDs for each CLIP number are set in 12.1.7 PBX Configuration—[4-1-7] Extension—Wired Extension—CLIP ID Table and 12.2.5 PBX Configuration—[4-2-5] Extension—Portable Station—CLIP ID Table. Value Range 1–8 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 796 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier TRG 01–TRG 64 Selects the trunk groups that connect to the carrier. TRG 01–TRG 64 Enables each trunk group for each carrier. If a cell is highlighted in blue, that trunk group is enabled for use with that carrier.
Page 797: Pbx Configuration-[8-6] Ars-Leading Number Exception
16.6 PBX Configuration—[8-6] ARS—Leading Number Exception 16.6 PBX Configuration—[8-6] ARS—Leading Number Exception Specifies telephone numbers that will not be connected using the ARS feature. When the user-dialled number includes a leading number exception, the PBX sends the number to a trunk by the Idle Line Access method if ARS Mode in 16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting is "on".
Page 798: Pbx Configuration-[8-7] Ars-Authorisation Code For Trg
16.7 PBX Configuration—[8-7] ARS—Authorisation Code for TRG 16.7 PBX Configuration—[8-7] ARS—Authorisation Code for TRG An Authorisation code can be specified for each trunk group. The Authorisation codes entered here can be added to user-dialled numbers by adding "G" to the Modify Command specified on the Carrier tab of screen 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier.
Page 799: Pbx Configuration-[9] Private Network
Section 17 PBX Configuration—[9] Private Network This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Private Network menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 800: Pbx Configuration-[9-1] Private Network-Tie Table
17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table A TIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs, which provides cost effective communications between company members at different locations. A maximum of 32 TIE Line Routing and Modification Tables can be programmed. It is necessary to make unified tables with all PBXs at different locations in a TIE line network in order to identify the trunk route to be used when an extension makes or receives a TIE line call.
Page 801: Trunk Group
17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table Removed Number of Digits Specifies the number of leading digits of the dialled number to be removed for each priority. Value Range 0–15 Maintenance Console Location 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table Feature Guide References 4.2.1 TIE Line Service Added Number Specifies the number to be added to the dialled number in place of the removed digits for each priority.
Page 802 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table Value Range Max. 3 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table Feature Guide References 4.2.5 QSIG Enhanced Features Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Activation Key Required) Enables Network Message Waiting information to be sent from the PBX to which the voice mail system is attached to extensions connected to other PBXs in the network.
Page 803: Pbx Configuration-[9-2] Private Network-Network Data Transmission
17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission Settings related to the transmission of extension BLF (Busy Line Field) data or Message Waiting notifications over a network of PBXs can be programmed. Extension BLF data is used to show the status of a monitored extension attached to another PBX on a Network DSS (NDSS) button.
Page 804 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Data Transmission ISDN->VoIP Selects whether to re-send BLF data received from an ISDN port through any VoIP ports that are set to transmit BLF data. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission...
Page 805 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission Feature Guide References 4.2.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat Counter Specifies the number of times re-transmission of network message waiting notifications is repeated before being cancelled.
Page 806: Pbx Configuration-[9-3] Private Network-Network Operator (Voip)
17.3 PBX Configuration—[9-3] Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP) 17.3 PBX Configuration—[9-3] Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP) This screen allows network operators to be programmed. A network operator is an extension at a remote PBX that will monitor other PBX extensions using Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS). The settings on this screen should be programmed at the PBX that is to be monitored ( Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Network PBX ID 2–8).
Page 807: Pbx Configuration-[9-4] Private Network-Ndss Key Table
17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4] Private Network—NDSS Key Table 17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4] Private Network—NDSS Key Table Extensions at up to 7 other PBXs that will be monitored using Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) can be registered. A maximum of 250 extensions can be registered. To create an NDSS button to monitor an extension, the extension must be registered here first.
Page 808 17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4] Private Network—NDSS Key Table Maintenance Console Location 17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4] Private Network—NDSS Key Table PC Programming Manual References 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission— Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Network PBX ID Feature Guide References 4.2.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) PC Programming Manual...
Page 809: Pbx Configuration-[9-5] Private Network-Centralised Um/Vm Unit
17.5 PBX Configuration—[9-5] Private Network—Centralised UM/VM Unit 17.5 PBX Configuration—[9-5] Private Network—Centralised UM/VM Unit View and programme settings for using the Unified Messaging system and VPSs in a private network. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 6.4 Tool—Extension List View).
Page 810 17.5 PBX Configuration—[9-5] Private Network—Centralised UM/VM Unit PC Programming Manual...
Page 811: Pbx Configuration-[10] Co & Incoming Call
Section 18 PBX Configuration—[10] CO & Incoming Call This section serves as reference operating instructions for the CO & Incoming Call menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 812: Pbx Configuration-[10-1] Co & Incoming Call-Co Line Settings
18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings Trunks can be assigned a name, and grouped into a maximum of 64 trunk groups. The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 813: Pbx Configuration-[10-2] Co & Incoming Call-Dil Table & Port Settings
18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings Direct In Line (DIL) or Direct Dialling In (DDI)/Direct Inward Dialling (DID) can be selected for each trunk as the method of distributing incoming trunk calls to certain destinations.
Page 814 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings Distribution Method Selects the distribution method for incoming trunk calls. The value range of this setting depends on the card type and Trunk Property assigned for each trunk. Value Range DIL: Distribution depends on the trunk through which the calls arrive DDI/DID: Distribution depends on the DDI/DID number of the calls Maintenance Console Location...
Page 815 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings 5.1.4 Time Service UM Service Group No. Specifies the Service Group number sent to the Unified Messaging system when the incoming call destination is the floating extension number of a UM group. The Service Group number is used to allow the Unified Messaging system to send the applicable greeting message to the caller.
Page 816 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings Maintenance Console Location 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings Feature Guide References 2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY Trunk Property Indicates the networking type of each trunk (reference only). Value Range Public, Private(TIE), VPN Maintenance Console Location...
Page 817 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings Feature Guide References 2.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL) 2.1.1.4 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution DDI/DID/TIE For each trunk to which DDI/DID distribution is set, or for each trunk whose Trunk Property on this screen is Private (TIE), modification parameters for DDI/DID number and TIE line call numbers can be programmed.
Page 818 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings Maintenance Console Location 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings Feature Guide References 2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY 2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) DDI/DID/TIE—Remove Digit Specifies the number of leading digits to be removed from the incoming called number for DDI/DID distribution or for TIE line service.
Page 819: Pbx Configuration-[10-3] Co & Incoming Call-Ddi / Did Table
18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table Incoming trunk calls with DDI/DID numbers can be distributed to specific destinations. Each DDI/DID number has a destination programmed for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night). When CLI distribution is enabled for a DDI/DID number, incoming trunk calls with that DDI/DID number will be distributed to the CLI destinations (instead of the DDI/DID destinations) if the caller’s identification number is found in the System Speed Dialling Table, which is used as the Caller ID Table.
Page 820 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table Feature Guide References 2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) DDI / DID Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the DDI/DID destination in each time mode. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO &...
Page 821 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table Value Range None, 1–64 Maintenance Console Location 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table Feature Guide References 2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) 3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview VM Trunk Group No.
Page 822: Pbx Configuration-[10-3] Co & Incoming Call-Ddi / Did Table-Automatic Registration
18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Automatic Registration 18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Automatic Registration Automatic Registration allows DDI/DID numbers and DDI/DID destinations in each time mode (day/lunch/ break/night) to be programmed at once for a set of locations in series. Beginning Entry Location Specifies the number of the first location to be programmed.
Page 823 18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Automatic Registration Maintenance Console Location 18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Automatic Registration PC Programming Manual References 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table Feature Guide References 2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the number of the DDI/DID destination in each time mode for the first location to be programmed.
Page 824: Pbx Configuration-[10-3] Co & Incoming Call-Ddi / Did Table-Name Generate
18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Name Generate 18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Name Generate Name Generate allows DDI/DID names to be programmed at once for a set of locations in series. If a name generated here is longer than 20 characters, the additional characters will be discarded. Beginning Entry Location Specifies the number of the first location to be programmed.
Page 825 18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Name Generate Maintenance Console Location 18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Name Generate PC Programming Manual References 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table Feature Guide References 2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) Name Prefix Specifies the text to be included at the start of each DDI/DID name.
Page 826: Pbx Configuration-[10-5] Co & Incoming Call-Miscellaneous
18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous The Intercept Routing feature can activate when the destination of an incoming call is unavailable, or when there is no destination for the call, to reroute the call to an alternate destination. Intercept—Intercept Routing - DND (Destination sets DND.) Enables the Intercept Routing—DND feature to activate when the original destination is in DND mode.
Page 827 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous Maintenance Console Location 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous Feature Guide References 2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing—No Destination PC Programming Manual...
Page 828 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous PC Programming Manual...
Page 829: Pbx Configuration-[11] Maintenance
Section 19 PBX Configuration—[11] Maintenance This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Maintenance menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 830: Pbx Configuration-[11-1] Maintenance-Main
19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main SMDR Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) automatically records detailed information about incoming and outgoing calls. SMDR Format—Type Selects the format of SMDR output. Value Range Type A: 80 digits without call charge information Type B: 80 digits with call charge information Type C: 120 digits Maintenance Console Location...
Page 831 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) SMDR Format—Blank Footer Length (Number of Lines) Specifies the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page. The number of lines for the skip perforation should be shorter than the page length.
Page 832 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Print Information—Outgoing Call Specifies whether the dialled digits of outgoing trunk calls are printed. Class of Service (COS) programming determines the printable records. Value Range No Print, Print Maintenance Console Location 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main PC Programming Manual References 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO &...
Page 833 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Print Information—Log-in / Log-out Specifies whether the log-in/log-out status is printed. Value Range No Print, Print Maintenance Console Location 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 2.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Print Information—Hotel Room Status Selects whether check-in and check-out data is output on SMDR.
Page 834 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 2.24.4 Timed Reminder Print Information—Error Log Specifies whether PBX error log information is output to SMDR. Value Range No Print, Print Maintenance Console Location 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 5.6.4 Local Alarm Information...
Page 835 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Option—DDI/DID Number & Name Selects the printing format of incoming trunk calls with a DDI/DID number. Value Range None, Number, Name, Name + Number Maintenance Console Location 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Page 836 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main PC Programming Manual References 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main—SMDR— Print Information—Outgoing Call Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Option—Condition Code "RC" Specifies whether the time of receiving an incoming trunk call is printed. Value Range No Print, Print Maintenance Console Location 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main...
Page 837 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main PC Programming Manual References 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Emergency Call Notification Specifies if an emergency call is recorded on SMDR only when the call is completed, or when the call is initially dialled as well.
Page 838 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) LAN—New Line Code for Telnet Specifies the new line code for a terminal emulator. If the terminal emulator automatically feeds lines with a carriage return, select CR (Carriage Return). If not, select CR + LF (Line Feed).
Page 839 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 5.6.4 Local Alarm Information Daily Test Start Time—Hour Specifies the hour of the PBX daily self check start time. Value Range 0–23 Maintenance Console Location 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 5.6.4 Local Alarm Information Daily Test Start Time—Minute Specifies the minute of the PBX daily self check start time.
Page 840 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Error Log for UM Port Busy—Detection Busy Threshold Time Enables error information to be logged in the PBX if UM ports were all busy time specified in Detection Busy Threshold Time. This item is recorded by Syslog. If this Log is frequently recorded in your customer, it indicates insufficiency of UM port.
Page 841 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main PC Programming Manual References 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table— Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Activation Key Required) Feature Guide References 4.2.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail Remote Remote—Analogue Remote (Modem) Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number for analogue remote maintenance. To enable this setting, an RMT card must be installed, and Remote—Remote Programming on this screen must be enabled.
Page 842 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 5.5.2 PC Programming Remote—Password Lock Counter for Remote Programming Specifies the number of successive incorrect password entries allowed before remote access is locked. Value Range None, 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 5.5.2 PC Programming Remote—Remote Maintenance Dial Number (Own Telephone number for...
Page 843 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 5.5.2 PC Programming System Password - PT Programming—Prog *#: Administrator Level Specifies the System password to authorise the PT user to access User Level programming. Value Range 4–10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References...
Page 844: Pbx Configuration-[11-2] Maintenance-Pt Programming Access
19.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2] Maintenance—PT Programming Access 19.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2] Maintenance—PT Programming Access The programming items accessible at User and Administrator level can be specified. 100 programming item numbers are displayed at a time. To display other sets of numbers, click the applicable tab. Program Number Indicates the programming item number (reference only).
Page 845: Pbx Configuration-[11-3] Maintenance-Air Synchronisation
19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—Air Synchronisation 19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—Air Synchronisation You can programme and view settings for Air Synchronisation Groups. Select an Air Synchronisation Group (1-4) to programme from the Air Synchronisation Group Number drop-down list. It is possible to synchronise CSs with each other within the air synchronisation group. Click Sort to reorder CSs with traditional CSs first, followed by IP-CSs.
Page 846 19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—Air Synchronisation Maintenance Console Location 19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—Air Synchronisation Slot Indicates the slot number (reference only). Value Range 4-5: Main unit 2-3: Expansion Unit 9-12: Virtual Slot Maintenance Console Location 19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—Air Synchronisation Port Indicates the port number (reference only).
Page 847 19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—Air Synchronisation Status Indicates whether a certain CS is registered (reference only). Value Range -, Registered Maintenance Console Location 19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—Air Synchronisation CS Class Specifies the classification of each CS. This parameter can only be modified when Connection on this screen is set to OUS.
Page 848 19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—Air Synchronisation Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—Air Synchronisation Primary CS—Port Indicates the port number of the primary CS (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—Air Synchronisation Primary CS—CS Name Indicates the name of the primary CS (reference only).
Page 849 19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—Air Synchronisation Maintenance Console Location 19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—Air Synchronisation Secondary CS—Slot Indicates the slot position of the secondary CS (reference only). Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—Air Synchronisation Secondary CS—Port Indicates the port number of the secondary CS (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location...
Page 850 19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—Air Synchronisation PC Programming Manual...
Page 851: Um Configuration-[1] Mailbox Settings
Section 20 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Mailbox Settings menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 852: Um Configuration-[1] Mailbox Settings
20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-1] Mailbox Settings—Quick Setting 20.1 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings A maximum of 500 subscriber mailboxes can be created. Although the System Manager can use a telephone to create or edit mailboxes, the System Administrator can create several mailboxes at once using Web Maintenance Console.
Page 853 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-1] Mailbox Settings—Quick Setting PC Programming Manual References 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 9 Feature Guide References 3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview 3.2.2 Subscriber Features—3.2.2.17 Mailbox Extension Specifies the extension number of the mailbox’s subscriber. Any valid extension number including an Extension Group number can be assigned.
Page 854 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-1] Mailbox Settings—Quick Setting Last Name Specifies the last name of the subscriber. If there are non-alphabetical characters in the first 4 letters of the first name, the mailbox is not included in the directory. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-1] Mailbox Settings—Quick Setting PC Programming Manual...
Page 855: Um Configuration-[1-2] Mailbox Settings-Full Setting
20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Mailbox Parameters Mailbox Number Specifies the subscriber’s mailbox number. The maximum number of digits that can be used for mailbox numbers is set in 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Mailbox— Mailbox No.
Page 856 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting 3.2.2.17 Mailbox First Name Specifies the first name of the subscriber. If there are non-alphabetical characters in the first 4 letters of the first name, the mailbox is not included in the directory. Value Range Max.
Page 857 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Value Range Max. 16 digits Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters PC Programming Manual References 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security—Subscriber Feature Guide References 3.1.2.4 Password Administration Mailbox Password (Message Client) Specifies the password needed to access the mailbox when using a client software programme.
Page 858 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Note • We recommend that parameters for each COS number be defined before assigning a Class of Service (COS) to each mailbox or creating new mailboxes. • COS No. 65 and 66 are assigned by default to the Message Manager and to the System Manager, respectively.
Page 859 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Value Range 2–[the value set in Mailbox No. Max. Length (3-8)] digits Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.24 Interview Service All Calls Transfer to Mailbox If this parameter is set to "Yes", the extension is considered to be a Logical Extension and therefore calls directed to the extension via Automated Attendant service are automatically forwarded to the extension mailbox.
Page 860 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting PC Programming Manual References 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—PBX Parameters— Environment—Extension Transfer Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D R F T X , ;]) Feature Guide References 3.2.2.7 Call Transfer Status Call Transfer Sequence (Other) Specifies the Call Transfer Sequence used by the mailbox.
Page 861 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting PC Programming Manual References 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Dialling Parameters/MSW Notification— Dialling Parameters—Call Transfer No Answer Time (10-60 s) Call Transfer Status Determines how the Unified Messaging system handles a call when it reaches the subscriber’s extension. Click Edit for the extension to change, programme the settings, and click OK to finish.
Page 862 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Feature Guide References 3.2.2.15 Incomplete Call Handling Service Incomplete Call Handling for Busy Specifies how the Unified Messaging system handles a call when the extension is busy. Click Edit for the extension to change, programme the settings, and click OK to finish. Note •...
Page 863 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Message Waiting Lamp If set to "Enable", the Message Waiting Lamp of the subscriber’s telephone turns on when a new message is recorded. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.29 Message Waiting Notification—Lamp Telephone Device...
Page 864 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Note When the Unified Messaging system calls a trunk via the PRI card, be sure to add "#" after the telephone number (1112223333 in the example here): 9P1112223333#PP123PP456PPX# (P: Dial Pause) Value Range Max. 32 digits consisting of 0–9, , # and special codes: , : Dial Pause (default 1 s) ;...
Page 865 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—No Answer Delay Time (min) Specifies the time (in minutes) the Unified Messaging system waits before retrying message notification when the called device does not answer. Value Range 1–120 min Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters Feature Guide References...
Page 866 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Feature Guide References 3.2.1.30 Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device Telephone Device—Device Notification Timer—Device Interval Time between Device 1, 2, 3 and Next Device Specifies how long the PBX waits after sending Message Waiting Notification to Device 1, 2, or 3 before sending notification to the next device.
Page 867 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.28 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Only Urgent Messages Specifies if Message Waiting Notifications will be sent only for urgent messages. Value Range Yes, No Maintenance Console Location...
Page 868 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Callback Number Specifies the callback number to be included in the notification. Value Range Max. 32 digits (0–9, , #) Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.28 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No.
Page 869 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting To specify if sent voice message is deleted from the Unified Message system after they are sent by e-mail, select "Yes" for Delete After Send (Voice File). Repeat steps 1 to 4 for each day to be programmed, and then click OK. Value Range Not use: The selected device is not used for message notification.
Page 870 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Value Range Primary, Selective, Guidance No. 1–8 Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/Personal Custom Serv PC Programming Manual References 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group— Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Incoming Call Service Prompt Feature Guide References...
Page 871 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Feature Guide References 3.2.1.2 Auto Forwarding Auto Forwarding Delay Time Specifies the length of time in hours and minutes that the system waits before forwarding unplayed messages. The maximum delay time is 99 h, 59 min. Note The delay time must be shorter than the New Message Retention Time, or else messages will be deleted before being forwarded.
Page 872 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/Personal Custom Serv Feature Guide References 3.2.1.2 Auto Forwarding Auto Forwarding Mode - Message Remains New Specifies if the forwarded messages remain marked as new. This setting is available only when Auto Forwarding Mode is set to "Copy".
Page 873 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Click Edit. For each Key, specify an Assigned Operation. For each Assigned Operation that is specified, specify a Value Click OK when finished. Assigned Operation • Transfer to specified mailbox: Allow the caller to leave messages in a specified mailbox. •...
Page 874 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Feature Guide References 3.2.2.21 Personal Custom Service No DTMF Input Operation Specifies the operation taken when no DTMF input (a caller does not dial anything) is received after the Personal Greeting. Value Range Recording: The caller will be guided to leave a message. Disconnect (All Day): The line will be disconnected, regardless of the time of day.
Page 875 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Personal Distribution List Feature Guide References 3.2.2.14 Group Distribution Lists List 1 Members–List 4 Members Specifies the mailbox numbers that belong to the list. Follow the steps below to edit list members. Click Edit for a List Members item.
Page 876 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct Service PC Programming Manual References 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service— Call Transfer to Outside Feature Guide References 3.2.2.26 Remote Call Forwarding Set Auto Login Extension When this item is set to "Enable", subscribers are able to access their mailbox directly without entering the mailbox number.
Page 877 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Auto Login Caller ID 1, 2 Specifies the telephone number from which the subscriber can automatically be logged in from. When Caller ID information is received that matches one of these numbers, the caller (subscriber) is automatically logged in to the mailbox.
Page 878 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Auto Login TRG No. Specifies the trunk number for Automatic Login. When the Unified Messaging system receives a call on this trunk, the caller (subscriber) is automatically logged in to the mailbox. Note that this number must be unique for each mailbox.
Page 879 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Feature Guide References 3.2.2.29 Toll Saver Direct Service UM Extension Specifies which features can be directly accessed by dialling a Unified Messaging extension number. This setting can only be specified for Unified Messaging extension numbers. Note Automatic Login must be enabled for extensions to use this feature.
Page 880 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Subscriber Service - All Messages Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the number of all messages in their mailbox when the subscriber logs in. Value Range Yes, No Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Announce Number of Messages Subscriber Service - New Voice Messages Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the number of only new voice messages in their mailbox when the subscriber logs in.
Page 881 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Value Range Yes, No Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Announce Number of Messages Receiving Message Service - New Voice Messages Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the number of only new voice messages in their mailbox when the subscriber has selected to listen to messages.
Page 882 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting • Company Greeting No. 1 can be recorded and changed from the Top Menu. This is useful for recording the Emergency Greeting. Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Quick Menu and Greeting Recording PC Programming Manual References 23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service Feature Guide References...
Page 883: Um Configuration-[1-3] Mailbox Settings-Auto Configuration
20.1.3 UM Configuration—[1-3] Mailbox Settings—Auto Configuration 20.1.3 UM Configuration—[1-3] Mailbox Settings—Auto Configuration Auto Configuration automatically associates extension numbers and mailboxes in bulk. This feature is available at the Installer level only. Select the following options Specifies Auto configuration mode from the following. Note In Re-create all mailboxes mode, all voice data is deleted, including data that is recorded in mailboxes.
Page 884 20.1.3 UM Configuration—[1-3] Mailbox Settings—Auto Configuration PC Programming Manual...
Page 885: Um Configuration-[2] Class Of Service
Section 21 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Class of Service menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 886: Um Configuration-[2] Class Of Service
21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Each mailbox is assigned a Class of Service (COS) that determines the set of services that are available to its subscriber. There are 66 classes. Mailboxes can be assigned to their own or to the same COS as needed. COS No.
Page 887 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General Feature Guide References 3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name Tutorial The tutorial is a series of voice prompts for setting up the mailbox that is played to subscribers when they first log in to their mailbox.
Page 888 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Remote Call Forward to CO Select if subscribers in the Class of Service can perform a Remote Call Forward to CO. Value Range Yes, No Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General Feature Guide References 3.2.2.26 Remote Call Forwarding Set E-mail Option...
Page 889 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Value Range Yes, No Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General Feature Guide References 3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview Message Manager Authority Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service have access to the Unified Messaging system as a Message Manager.
Page 890 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Value Range 1–360 s Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox Feature Guide References 3.2.2.22 Personal Greetings Message Length (Selection) Specifies if the length of messages left for subscribers in the Class of Service are unlimited in duration or have a specified time limit.
Page 891 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Mailbox Capacity Maximum Message Time (Limited) (min) Specifies the total number of available minutes for storing messages (both new and saved) for mailboxes of subscribers in the Class of Service. Only specified if Mailbox Capacity Maximum Message Time (Selection) is set to "Limited".
Page 892 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Saved Message Retention Time (Limited) (days) Defines the number of days that saved messages will remain in mailboxes for subscribers in the Class of Service. Only specified if Saved Message Retention Time (Selection) is set to "Limited". Value Range 1–30 days Maintenance Console Location...
Page 893 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Message Envelope Setting Specifies when message envelopes (message date and time, name of the person who recorded or transferred the message, telephone number of the caller) are announced. Value Range Before: The system announces the message envelope before playing the recorded message. After: The system announces the message envelope after playing the recorded message.
Page 894 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox Message Cancel for Live Call Screening If set to "Yes", the caller’s message will be deleted when a subscriber in the Class of Service answers a call via Live Call Screening while the caller is leaving a message.
Page 895 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Caller ID Callback If set to "Yes", subscribers in the Class of Service can call the caller back while listening to the caller’s message (Caller ID Callback). Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox Feature Guide References 3.2.2.9 Caller ID Callback...
Page 896 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox First Playback Urgent Message If set to "Yes", the system plays urgent messages before regular messages for subscribers in the Class of Service. Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox...
Page 897 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox New Message Length Announcement If set to "Yes", the system announces the total length of new messages when the number of new messages is announced for subscribers in the Class of Service.
Page 898: Call Transfer
21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Two-way Recorded Message Save Mode Specifies whether two-way recording sessions are saved in the mailboxes of subscribers in the Class of Service as "old" or "new" messages. Value Range Save as Old, Save as New Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox Feature Guide References...
Page 899 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Caller ID Screen If set to "Yes", subscribers in the Class of Service can hear the pre-recorded names of callers when they receive calls (Caller ID Screening). Note This setting is not available for COS 65 (Message Manager). Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location...
Page 900 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Hospitality Mode Hospitality Mode Specifies whether subscribers in the Class of Service have the Hospitality Mode enabled. (For use with extensions for hotel rooms, etc.) This setting must be set to "Yes" to enable other Hospitality Mode settings. When this item is set to "Yes", only the following options are made available to subscribers: •...
Page 901 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Hospitality Mode Feature Guide References 3.2.1.21 Hospitality Mode 3.2.2.22 Personal Greetings Owner Name Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service are given a voice prompt selection to change the mailbox owner’s name when accessing their mailbox.
Page 902 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Hospitality Mode Feature Guide References 2.23.1 Hospitality Features—SUMMARY 3.2.1.21 Hospitality Mode Erase When Check Out - Owner Name Specifies if the Owner Name of the subscriber in the Class of Service is erased when the subscriber’s extension is set to the "Check Out"...
Page 903: Um Configuration-[3] Um Extension / Trunk Service
Section 22 UM Configuration—[3] UM Extension / Trunk Service This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Port/Trunk Service menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 904: Um Configuration-[3-1] Um Extension / Trunk Service-Service Group
22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group The parameters of Service Groups determine how calls are handled throughout the day. Each Service Group (therefore each port) can have a different call service for each time mode (day, night, lunch, break). One of 5 incoming call services (Voice Mail, Automated Attendant, Interview, Custom Service or Transfer to Mailbox) can be assigned to each call service.
Page 905 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group Maintenance Console Location 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Incoming Call Service Parameter Specifies the parameter for the type of Incoming Call Service specified. This is disabled if "Voice Mail Service"...
Page 906 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group Value Range Primary, Guidance No. 1–8 Maintenance Console Location 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group PC Programming Manual References 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Prompt Setting— Primary Language Feature Guide References 3.2.1.41 System Prompts Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Delayed Answer Time Specifies whether the Unified Messaging system answers calls on the port or trunk immediately (0) or after a...
Page 907: Um Configuration-[3-2] Um Extension / Trunk Service-Port Assignment
22.2 UM Configuration—[3-2] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Port Assignment 22.2 UM Configuration—[3-2] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Port Assignment You can assign a Service Group created in 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group to each UM port. For each UM port number, select a Service Group number (1–64) from the Service Group drop-down list. Click OK when finished.
Page 908 22.2 UM Configuration—[3-2] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Port Assignment PC Programming Manual...
Page 909: Um Configuration-[4] Service Settings
Section 23 UM Configuration—[4] Service Settings This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Service Settings menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 910: Um Configuration-[4-1] Service Settings-Caller Id / Pin Call Routing
23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing A maximum of 200 Caller ID/PIN numbers can be assigned so that callers are automatically forwarded to a pre-programmed destination. A different destination can be set for each time mode (day, night, lunch, break). For Mode, select Caller-ID Mode or PIN Mode from the drop-down list, and then click the button to assign a routing destination.
Page 911 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing Maintenance Console Location 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing Feature Guide References 3.2.1.8 Caller ID Call Routing Description Specifies a name and/or description of the Caller ID number. Note When no data is specified in this parameter, the caller’s name will be automatically entered here if the caller’s name is received from the telephone company.
Page 912 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing PIN Mode PIN No. Specifies a PIN number (or range of PIN numbers using the wild card, " ") for callers from a specific number or range of numbers that are to be automatically forwarded to a pre-programmed destination. For more information on using "...
Page 913: Um Configuration-[4-2] Service Settings-Parameters
23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Automated Attendant Wait Time for First Digit (0-20 s) Specifies the length of time the system waits for the caller to dial a digit before assuming the caller cannot input a DTMF signal and therefore activates No DTMF Input Call Coverage Value Range 0–20 s...
Page 914 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Operator Service When operator calls are made, calls are connected to the lowest-numbered operator that is available. To enable/disable the operator setting for each time mode, check/uncheck it. Note • The extension assigned as Operator 1 for day mode is automatically designated as the Message Manager.
Page 915 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.34 Operator Service Operator Service—Operator’s Mailbox Specifies the mailbox number for Operator 1, 2, and 3. Callers to Operator 1, 2, or 3 are prompted to leave a message in this mailbox depending upon how the Busy Coverage Mode or No Answer Coverage Mode is set. Value Range 2–8 digits Maintenance Console Location...
Page 916 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Maintenance Console Location 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters PC Programming Manual References 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting— No DTMF Input Operation Feature Guide References 3.2.1.34 Operator Service Operator Service—Operator No Answer Time (10-60 s) When a call to an operator is not answered within the time set, the system will offer other options as defined Operator Service—No Answer Coverage Mode.
Page 917 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Call Hold Mode—Call Queuing Announcement Mode If set to "Enable", callers on hold are informed of their current position in the call hold queue. Example: "One other person is waiting to connect." Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Feature Guide References...
Page 918 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Deleting an Alternate Extension Select the desired alternate extension. Click Delete. Click Yes. Changing the order of Alternate Extensions Select an extension and click Move up or Move down to change its order in the list. Alternate extensions will be dialled in order from top to bottom.
Page 919 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Maintenance Console Location 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.3 Automated Attendant (AA) No DTMF Input Operation No DTMF Input Call Coverage for Day, Night, Lunch, and Break (Selection) Specifies where a caller will be transferred when there is no DTMF input in response to system guidance (for example, the caller is using a rotary phone) for each time mode.
Page 920 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Value Range 3–4 digits Maintenance Console Location 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name Name Entry Time Out (1-10 s) Specifies the length of time that the system waits for the caller to enter the first 3 or 4 digits (letters) of the desired party’s name.
Page 921 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Maintenance Console Location 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name Toll Saver Delayed Answer Time for New Message (5-60 s) Specifies the time period before the system answers the call when there are new messages. Value Range 5–60 s Maintenance Console Location...
Page 922: Um Configuration-[4-3] Service Settings-Custom Service
23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service 23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service A Custom Service allows callers to perform specific functions by pressing dial buttons on their telephones while listening to voice guidance (Custom Service Menu). Custom Services allow callers to connect themselves to an extension, mailbox, Mailbox Group, operator, fax machine, etc., without the assistance of an operator.
Page 923 23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service [From the Custom Service Diagram] Double-click the desired Custom Service icon in the diagram, or right-click on the desired icon and select Edit. Edit the parameters in the Custom Service parameters dialogue box. Click OK. Example: Setting "Menu &...
Page 924: Um Configuration-[4-3] Service Settings-Custom Service-Menu & Transfer
23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer 23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer The below parameters are set for the Menu Transfer Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder. This Custom Service type guides callers to press certain buttons to connect themselves with the designated party.
Page 925 23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer Menu Repeat Cycle (1-3) Specifies the number of times the Custom Service menu message will be repeated for the caller. Value Range 1–3 times Maintenance Console Location 23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer Feature Guide References 3.2.1.15 Custom Service Call Transfer Anytime...
Page 926 23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer Maintenance Console Location 23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer Feature Guide References 3.2.1.15 Custom Service Wait for Second Digit (1-5 s) This parameter is only valid when Call Transfer Anytime is set to a value other than "No". After the caller dials a digit (the first digit) after listening to a Custom Service menu, the system waits for a second digit to be dialled.
Page 927 23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer Key – Assigned Operation: 0–9, *, # Any of the 16 operations listed below can be assigned to the 0 through 9, , and # keys on the telephone keypad. Callers are able to access these operations by pressing the corresponding keys on their telephones. Value Range Trf to Mbx: Allows the caller to leave messages in a specified mailbox.
Page 928: Um Configuration-[4-3] Service Settings-Custom Service-Date Control
23.3.2 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Date Control 23.3.2 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Date Control The below parameters are set for the Date Control Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder. This service allows you to assign a different operation for up to 5 time periods. The caller makes no selection and no menu is announced.
Page 929 23.3.2 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Date Control Feature Guide References 3.2.1.15 Custom Service PC Programming Manual...
Page 930: Um Configuration-[4-3] Service Settings-Custom Service-Time Control
23.3.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Time Control 23.3.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Time Control The below parameters are set for the Time Control Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder. This service allows you to assign a different operation for up to 5 blocks of time during the day. The caller makes no selection and no menu is announced.
Page 931 23.3.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Time Control Maintenance Console Location 23.3.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Time Control Feature Guide References 3.2.1.15 Custom Service PC Programming Manual...
Page 932: Um Configuration-[4-3] Service Settings-Custom Service-Day Control
23.3.4 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Day Control 23.3.4 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Day Control The below parameters are set for the Menu Transfer Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder. This service allows you to assign a different operation for each day of the week, and for all holidays. The caller makes no selection and no menu is announced.
Page 933: Um Configuration-[4-3] Service Settings-Custom Service-Password
23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Password 23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Password The below parameters are set for the Password Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder. This service requires that callers enter a password, followed by "#". Each password is assigned an operation. If a password is entered correctly, the caller is handled by the password’s pre-programmed operation.
Page 934 23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Password Feature Guide References 3.2.1.15 Custom Service Maximum Number of Invalid Entry (1-10) Specifies the number of times an invalid password is entered before the operation assigned for Entry Failure is executed. Value Range 1–10 times Maintenance Console Location 23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Password Feature Guide References...
Page 935 23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Password Feature Guide References 3.2.1.15 Custom Service Pass1–5, Cancel Pass1–5: Specifies a password and an operation for the specified password. Cancel: Determines the operation that is activated when a caller presses "#" to cancel password entry. Value Range Pass1–5: Password: Max.
Page 936: Um Configuration-[4-4] Service Settings-Holiday Table
23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table Holidays can be set for and assigned to trunks and Unified Messaging ports. When a call is received from a certain trunk or by a certain subscriber during the time frame set for an assigned holiday, the call handling settings for that holiday will be used.
Page 937 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table Maintenance Console Location 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table PC Programming Manual References 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table → Holiday Table—Start Date—Month → Holiday Table—Start Date—Day Feature Guide References 3.2.1.20 Holiday Service Start Time Specifies the time of day on the specified date at which to begin the holiday service.
Page 938 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table End Time Specifies the time of day on the specified date at which to end the holiday service. Click the cell to display an array of hours and minutes. Select an hour of the day and a minute of the hour to set the time. Value Range Hour and Minute Maintenance Console Location...
Page 939 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table Service One of 4 incoming call services (Voice Mail, Automated Attendant, Interview, or Custom Service) can be assigned to each holiday. After a greeting is played (if specified), the call will be transferred to the selected service.
Page 940 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table Port Affected Specify which UM ports will be subject to the holiday setting. Click Edit, and then select the check boxes for the UM ports to be subject to the holiday setting, or select the All check box to apply the holiday to all UM ports.
Page 941: Um Configuration-[5] System Parameters
Section 24 UM Configuration—[5] System Parameters This section serves as reference operating instructions for the System Parameters menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 942: Um Configuration-[5-1] System Parameters-Mailbox Group
24.1 UM Configuration—[5-1] System Parameters—Mailbox Group 24.1 UM Configuration—[5-1] System Parameters—Mailbox Group Also called System Group Distribution Lists. Mailbox Groups allow a caller or subscriber to record a message and have it sent to several mailboxes. Messages sent to a Mailbox Group are sent to all subscribers in the group.
Page 943 24.1 UM Configuration—[5-1] System Parameters—Mailbox Group Select the desired WAV file. Click Open to import the file. Click OK. Group List No. Specifies the Mailbox Group number. This number is similar to a mailbox number and is used to send a message to all subscribers of the group.
Page 944: Um Configuration-[5-2] System Parameters-Extension Group
24.2 UM Configuration—[5-2] System Parameters—Extension Group 24.2 UM Configuration—[5-2] System Parameters—Extension Group An Extension Group is a group of extensions that share a common mailbox. Each group has an Extension Group number. If the group number is assigned as the owner of a mailbox, then all members cannot be assigned their own personal mailboxes.
Page 945 24.2 UM Configuration—[5-2] System Parameters—Extension Group Feature Guide References 3.2.1.18 Extension Group Group Name Specifies the group name. Value Range Max. 32 characters Maintenance Console Location 24.2 UM Configuration—[5-2] System Parameters—Extension Group Feature Guide References 3.2.1.18 Extension Group PC Programming Manual...
Page 946: Um Configuration-[5-3] System Parameters-System Caller Name Announcement
24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement 24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement Allows the System Administrator to store a maximum of 200 telephone numbers and record a caller name for each telephone number. The caller name is announced when playing a message in their mailbox from one of the pre-programmed callers, when the system transfers a call to the subscriber from one of the pre-programmed callers (Caller ID Screening), and when the system pages the subscriber by intercom (Intercom Paging).
Page 947 24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement Click Open to import the file. Click OK. Caller-ID No. Assigns the telephone number for which the system announces the pre-recorded caller name to extension users. Value Range Max. 20 digits consisting of 0–9 Maintenance Console Location 24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement Feature Guide References...
Page 948: Um Configuration-[5-4] System Parameters-Parameters
24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Daily Hours Setting Clock Format Specifies the time format (12-hour or 24-hour). Note The selected time format (12-hour or 24-hour) affects the time format of reports as well as the time that appears in e-mail notifications for new messages.
Page 949 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Evening Hours Start Time (HH:MM) Specifies the starting time of the evening greeting. Value Range HH:MM (HH: Hour, MM: Minute) Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.12 Company Greeting Prompt Setting These settings are required when Multilingual Service is enabled.
Page 950 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters PC Programming Manual References 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Prompt for No DTMF Input Callers 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—External Message Delivery Feature Guide References 3.2.1.31 Multilingual Service 3.2.1.41 System Prompts Language 1–5—Language...
Page 951 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.41 System Prompts Selection Menu Repeat Cycle (1-3 times) Specifies the number of times the system will play the Multilingual Selection Menu. Value Range 1–3 Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters...
Page 952 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.41 System Prompts System Guidance—System Guidance Specifies the parameters which vary depending on the language assigned as the System Guidance language. For each selection of this setting, related items within "System Guidance 1–8" can be set. Value Range Guidance No.
Page 953 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters System Guidance—Select Language—# Announcement Mode Specifies the way of announcement for the "#" character when "US-English" or "English (UK)" is selected as System Guidance. Value Range POUND, HASH Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters PBX Parameters...
Page 954 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters , : Dial Pause (default 1 s) ; : Dial Pause (default 3 s) X: Extension Dialling 0–9, , #: Dial Code Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters PBX Environment—Alternate Extension Transfer Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D R F T X , ;]) Specifies the sequence for transferring calls to extensions in the Alternate Extension Group.
Page 955 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters PC Programming Manual References 12.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1] Extension—Wired Extension— FWD No Answer Time 12.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2] Extension—Portable Station— FWD No Answer Time Dialling Parameters—Outgoing Call No Answer Time (10-90 s) Specifies the length of time that the system waits before concluding that there is no answer at the outside number called.
Page 956 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.30 Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device External Message Delivery Determines how essential External Message Delivery features are carried out. Retry Times (times) Specifies the number of times the system will attempt to deliver an external message when the destination is busy or does not answer.
Page 957 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.2.12 External Message Delivery Service Outgoing Call UM Extensions Specifies the Unified Messaging extensions for the External Message Delivery feature. Value Range UM port extension number Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters PC Programming Manual References 9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property Feature Guide References...
Page 958 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters System External Message Delivery Duration Time (1-9 min) Specifies the maximum length of External Message Delivery calls. The timer begins counting when the called party answers the call, and if the called party has not pressed the appropriate dial key to initiate message playback, the system terminates the call when this timer expires.
Page 959 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Announcement Repeat Cycle (1-3 times) Specifies the number of times the system announces the page. Example: "I have a call for (name)". Value Range 1–3 times Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.23 Intercom Paging Intercom Paging Retry (1-10 times) Specifies the number of times to retry paging when the called subscriber has set...
Page 960 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.23 Intercom Paging Fax Management You can programme the system to automatically detect incoming fax calls and forward those calls to a fax extension. You can specify a maximum of 2 fax extensions as the destination for faxes; if the main fax extension is not available to receive a fax, the system will forward the fax call to the alternate fax extension.
Page 961 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Value Range 5–60 s Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Fax Manager Mailbox No. Specifies the mailbox number of the Fax Manager. The system will notify the Fax Manager of the status of fax calls depending upon the settings of the Fax No Answer Coverage Mode and Fax Notification Mode...
Page 962 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Disconnect Parameters Maximum Silence Time (0-60 s) Specifies the length of silence detected by the system before the system disconnects the call. Value Range 0–60 s Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Maximum Continuous Tone Time (0-60 s) Specifies the length of time the system waits when a continuous tone is detected before it disconnects the call.
Page 963 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Transfer to Outside These parameters determine how the system will transfer calls to a trunk via the following features: Call Transfer Service, Custom Service, Personal Custom Service, Caller ID Callback, Call-through Service. Outside Transfer Sequence—Call Transfer to Outside Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D F R T , ;...
Page 964 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Outside Transfer Sequence—EFA Transfer Reconnect Sequence on Busy (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D F R T , ; N A]) Specifies the sequence the system uses to reconnect the line when the party transferred with EFA (External Feature Access) is busy.
Page 965 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters the time specified in Dialling Parameters—Outgoing Call No Answer Time (10-90 s) in Dialling Parameters/MSW Notification. If the transferred party does not answer the call within this time, the system considers it as a No Answer call. Analyze: The system monitors the status of the trunk, recognises that the destination party goes off-hook, and connects the line.
Page 966 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Trunk Group (1–64)—Outside Line Access Sequence for Caller ID Callback (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D F R T , ; ]) Specifies the sequence of trunk access numbers for Caller ID Callback. This parameter is available when the system executes Caller ID Callback without using EFA.
Page 967 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.28 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device Full Name (Up to 64 ASCII characters) Specifies the full name that will appear in e-mail messages sent by the Unified Messaging system. Value Range Max. 64 characters Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Feature Guide References...
Page 968 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Message Client Password Lockup Time (5-60 min) Specifies the amount of time access will be locked after a password has been incorrectly entered 3 consecutive times. Value Range 5–60 min Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Mailbox Mailbox No.
Page 969: Um Configuration-[6] H/W Settings
Section 25 UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings This section serves as reference operating instructions for the H/W Settings menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 970: Um Configuration-[6] H/W Settings
25.1 UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings 25.1 UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings Global Parameters Global parameters define the settings that affect integration with other PBX operations. Maximum Time to Wait for Dial Tone (500-20000 ms, *100 ms) Specifies the length of time that the system waits for dial tone detection. Value Range 5–200 (´...
Page 971: Um Configuration-[7] System Security
Section 26 UM Configuration—[7] System Security This section serves as reference operating instructions for the System Security menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 972: Um Configuration-[7] System Security
26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security Manager Login Failures before Disconnection (1-99 times) Specifies the number of times an invalid password can be entered, when the System Manager or Message Manager tries to log in to the system using a telephone, before the call is disconnected. Value Range 1–99 times Maintenance Console Location...
Page 973 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security Value Range 4–16 characters (A–Z, a–z, 1–9) Maintenance Console Location 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security—Manager Feature Guide References 3.1.2.7 System Security Message Manager Access from Telephone Enables or disables access to the system from the Message Manager’s telephone. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 974 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security Value Range 4–16 characters (A–Z, a–z, 1–9) Maintenance Console Location 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security—Manager Feature Guide References 3.1.2.7 System Security Subscriber Minimum Password Length (0-16 digits) Specifies the minimum length (number of digits) of mailbox passwords. Value Range 0–16 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 975 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security—Subscriber Feature Guide References 3.1.2.7 System Security Default Password—Fix digit (which length is minimum password length) Select this option to specify a fixed password for all new mailboxes. The number of digits in the password must be equal or greater than the value specified in Minimum Password Length (0-16 digits).
Page 976 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security PC Programming Manual...
Page 977: Network Service
Section 27 Network Service This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Network Service menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 978: Network Service-[1] Ip Address/Ports
27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports Basic Settings LAN Setting—DHCP Port Number Specifies the port number of the DHCP client. This parameter is only available for entering values when Obtain an IP address automatically is selected. Value Range 68, 1024–65535 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 979 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports Maintenance Console Location 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports—Basic Settings LAN Setting—Subnet Mask Specifies the network mask address of the mother board. This parameter is only available for entering values when Use the following IP address is selected. Value Range 0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255 (except 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255) Maintenance Console Location...
Page 980 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports Feature Guide References 5.6.6 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Assignment DNS Setting—Preferred DNS IP Address Specifies the preferred IP address for the DNS server. This parameter is only available for entering values when Use the following DNS server address is selected. Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 981: Advanced Settings
27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports DSP IP Setting—DSP Card-1/DSP Card-2—MAC Address Indicates the MAC address of the DSP card (reference only). Value Range 00:00:00:00:00:00–FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF Maintenance Console Location 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports—Basic Settings Advanced Settings LAN Port—Speed & Duplex Specifies the connection mode of the main port. The connection is made in 100Mbps/half duplex when Auto negotiation fails.
Page 982 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports Reference The items displayed in this tab are the settings obtained from a DHCP server by the DHCP client of the PBX. They are for reference only. Assigned IP Address—IP Address Indicates the assigned IP address of the mother board (reference only). Maintenance Console Location 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports—Reference Assigned IP Address—MAC Address...
Page 983 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports Maintenance Console Location 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports—Reference DSP Card-1/DSP Card-2—Subnet Mask Indicates the Subnet Mask address of the DSP card (reference only). Maintenance Console Location 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports—Reference DSP Card-1/DSP Card-2—Default Gateway Indicates the Default Gateway address of the DSP card (reference only).
Page 984: Network Service-[2] Server Feature
27.2.1 Network Service—[2-1] Server Feature—DHCP 27.2 Network Service—[2] Server Feature 27.2.1 Network Service—[2-1] Server Feature—DHCP Settings for the DHCP Server can be programmed. DHCP Server DHCP Server Specifies if the DHCP server functions of the PBX are enabled or not. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 985 27.2.1 Network Service—[2-1] Server Feature—DHCP Maintenance Console Location 27.2.1 Network Service—[2-1] Server Feature—DHCP Lease interval (h) Specifies the duration in hours of the DHCP allocation lease. Setting "0" specifies an unlimited lease duration. Value Range 1–168 (hours) Maintenance Console Location 27.2.1 Network Service—[2-1] Server Feature—DHCP Auto assignment exclusions Up to 16 IP Addresses can be specified that will not be automatically assigned.
Page 986 27.2.1 Network Service—[2-1] Server Feature—DHCP IP Address Assignment List MAC Address Specifies MAC addresses currently specified by the system. Value Range 00:00:00:00:00:00–FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF Maintenance Console Location 27.2.1 Network Service—[2-1] Server Feature—DHCP IP Address Specifies IP addresses currently assigned by the system. Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 987: Network Service-[2-2] Server Feature-Ftp
27.2.2 Network Service—[2-2] Server Feature—FTP 27.2.2 Network Service—[2-2] Server Feature—FTP Settings for FTP server connections can be programmed. FTP Server Enables or disables the PBX’s FTP server function. Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 27.2.2 Network Service—[2-2] Server Feature—FTP Connection Control—Control Port number Specifies the port number for connecting to the PBX’s FTP server.
Page 988 27.2.2 Network Service—[2-2] Server Feature—FTP Note Be sure to change the user name from its initial, default value. Also, for security reasons, change the user name regularly. Value Range Max. 24 characters (a–z, 0–9, [hyphen], [underscore]) Note The first character must be a letter (a–z). Maintenance Console Location 27.2.2 Network Service—[2-2] Server Feature—FTP User Information—Password...
Page 989: Network Service-[2-4] Server Feature-Http
27.2.3 Network Service—[2-4] Server Feature—HTTP 27.2.3 Network Service—[2-4] Server Feature—HTTP HTTP server settings can be programmed. HTTP (LAN)—Port number Specifies the port number for HTTP connections using the LAN ports. This port is used for accessing the PBX for Web Maintenance Console programming. Value Range 80, 1024–65535 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 990: Network Service-[2-5] Server Feature-Ntp
27.2.4 Network Service—[2-5] Server Feature—NTP 27.2.4 Network Service—[2-5] Server Feature—NTP NTP server settings for use with KX-UT series SIP phones can be programmed. NTP server Enables or disables NTP service with the PBX’s NTP server for connected KX-UT series SIP phones. When this feature is enabled, the PBX will report to connected KX-UT series SIP phones the information obtained from the SNTP server specified in 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date &...
Page 991: Network Service-[2-6] Server Feature-Smtp
27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP 27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP Settings for SMTP for sending e-mail for PBX functions can be programmed. Mail sending—Mail sender information name Specifies the name to be used as the sender of the e-mails from the PBX. Value Range Max.
Page 992 27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP Value Range Enable, Disable Note When Enable is selected, the encryption method used is STARTTLS. Maintenance Console Location 27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP SMTP Authentication—SMTP Authentication Specifies whether authentication on the SMTP server is enabled. Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 993 27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP Maintenance Console Location 27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP POP Before SMTP—POP server address Specifies the IP address or host name of the POP server when POP before SMTP is enabled. Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 (IP address), Max. 128 characters (host name) Maintenance Console Location 27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP POP Before SMTP—POP server Port number...
Page 994 27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP Mail Receiving—SMTP over TLS Specifies whether mail receiving uses Transport Layer Security for SMTP. Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP Mail Receiving—Receive Port number (SMTPs) Specifies the receiving port number when using SMTPs.
Page 995: Network Service-[2-7] Server Feature-Imap4
27.2.6 Network Service—[2-7] Server Feature—IMAP4 27.2.6 Network Service—[2-7] Server Feature—IMAP4 Settings for IMAP4 server functions for the PBX can be programmed. IMAP4—IMAP4 server Specifies whether to enable the IMAP4 server functions of the PBX. Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 27.2.6 Network Service—[2-7] Server Feature—IMAP4 IMAP4—Port number Specifies a port number for the IMAP server.
Page 996 27.2.6 Network Service—[2-7] Server Feature—IMAP4 Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 27.2.6 Network Service—[2-7] Server Feature—IMAP4 Authenticated Connection Timeout—Authenticated Connection Timeout (min) Specifies the amount of time of no activity that is required before an authenticated connection to the IMAP4 server will be disconnected.
Page 997: Network Service-[3] Client Feature
27.3.1 Network Service—[3-1] Client Feature—FTP 27.3 Network Service—[3] Client Feature 27.3.1 Network Service—[3-1] Client Feature—FTP FTP client connection settings can be programmed. Up to 5 FTP sites can be specified for connections. Connection 1—Connection 5 Connection Name Specifies the name of the connection to use for programming in other items. Value Range Max.
Page 998 27.3.1 Network Service—[3-1] Client Feature—FTP User name Specifies the user name required to log in to the FTP site. Value Range Max. 24 characters (a–z, 0–9, $, [hyphen], [underscore]) Note • The first character must be a letter or number. •...
Page 999: Network Service-[3-2] Client Feature-Syslog
27.3.2 Network Service—[3-2] Client Feature—Syslog 27.3.2 Network Service—[3-2] Client Feature—Syslog Settings can be programmed for a Syslog client connection. Remote Syslog Specifies whether an external Syslog server will be used with the PBX. Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 27.3.2 Network Service—[3-2] Client Feature—Syslog Remote Syslog server—IP address / Host name Specifies the IP address or host name of the external Syslog server.
Page 1000: Network Service-[3-3] Client Feature-Snmp Agent
27.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent 27.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent Using SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol), it is possible for a PC assigned as an SNMP manager to manage and receive PBX system status information, such as alarm information and general system activity. The related PBX system settings can be programmed.

Panasonic KX-NS500 Pc Programming Manual

1 Overview

2 Introduction of Web Maintenance Console

3 Web Maintenance Console Home Screen

4 Status

5 System Control

6 Tool

7 Utility

8 Users

9 PBX Configuration-[1] Configuration

10 PBX Configuration-[2] System

11 PBX Configuration-[3] Group

12 PBX Configuration-[4] Extension

Quick Links

Related Manuals for Panasonic KX-NS500

Summary of Contents for Panasonic KX-NS500